Home

Docu-Mint User Guide

1. RPG Call Containing Search String in Text LG LIB RPG Program to collect calls from tasks LG LIB RPG Client maintenance LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 305 RPG Client information display LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 306 RPG Client maintenance LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 307 Number of programs referenced by file 29 Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports 197 Analysis Select Omit Rules Listing DM 306 This report prints a list of the Select and Omit rules defined in the selected analysis 10 29 97 16 00 40 Rule Detail Listing Analysis 1 FILE Analyze files in LG LIB Objects Analyzed ALL LG LIB PropertyRelRule Details Sequence SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OMDINDAUOBWNHPE DIDGHBWNHEO NNN Ne OW N w ATR EQ 6 0 N COLHDG CT 1 date Date DATE YYMM MMDD EDTCDE EQ Y EDTWRD CT TEXT CT 1 Date Dt dt Dat dat T TEXT CT 1 Number number client Client TATYPE EQ A T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG CALD CDDWNU T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG CLD2 CDDWNU T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG COMF CCCLNU T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKF TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL1 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL2 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL3 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL4 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL5 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL6 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL8 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL9 TMUPID T QNAME EQ LG LIB
2. ccccccccncccvcccccccsecsesssecsesees 111 Option 1 Program Field Cross Reference Report 0 cess eee eee 112 Option 2 Database File Field Cross Reference Report 0 0000s 115 Option 3 Reference Field Cross Reference Report 000s eee e eee eee 117 Option 4 Work with Program Field Usage 0 cece cece cece eee 119 Option 20 Work with Extended Field Analysis 0 000 eee e eee 121 Chapter 8 MENU DM UTL DOCU MINT UTILITIES ccccceccccccccccccecescseceeessessaseees 123 Option 1 Scan Source ne nab eee nes cane haere canal bie EEEE EE E 124 Option 2 Indent CL Source 0 eee ee eee nee n nee e ees 125 Option 3 Indent RPG Source 0 cece cee nee nee eens 126 Option 4 Edit Local Data Area 0 ccc rererere 128 Options 5 amp 6 Refresh Library Control Files 0 cee cece eee eee 129 Option 7 Format ILE RPG Source Member 00s eee e ee eee eee ee 129 Chapter 9 MENU DM CFG DOCU MINT CONFIGURATION ccccccccvccccccceecsecseeceecees 131 Option 1 Change Docu Mint Control Data 0 cece eee eee 132 Option 2 Change Library Attributes 0 cece eee ee 133 Option 3 Work with Library Lists 0 cece eee 134 Creating New Library Lists serron do ikni Cora e EREE eee es 135 Options to Work With Library Lists 00 cece eee eee 135 Creating and Changing Library Li
3. ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith Program Calls Parent Object ENHGO1 Library GN LIB Object type MODULE PGM MODULE Type options press Enter S Display Explode 9 Browse source member Source Called sass Object Master Information gt Opt Seq Object Library Object text Type 2 147 00 GN GO1MSO GN SRC Load fragments store tokens wr MODULE 224 00 GN G01M51 GN LIB ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSys MODULE 2 229 00 GN G01M51 GN LIB ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSys MODULE m 271 00 GN OVR GN LIB ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSys PGH a 277 00 QCMDEXC GN LIB Object not found PGM 354 00 GN ZSUPR GN SRC Zero suppress routine RPGMOD MODULE M 731 00 GN GO1MS52 GN LIB ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSys MODULE m 751 00 GN G01M50 GN SRC Load fragments store tokens wr MODULE L 759 00 GN G01M50 GN SRC Load fragments store tokens wr MODULE 767 00 GN GO1M53 GN LIB ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSys MODULE More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Browse parent source member r gt 3 23 3 23 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM Figure 10 6 5 Display Use this option to display additional information about a program call 7 Explode Use option 7 to drill down and explode one of the programs appearing in the list If you do this you can press F3 at any time to return to the previous pare
4. iam 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal 10l x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork With Extended Field Analysis Analysis process number E Type options press Enter 1 Analyze 2 Change 3 Copy 4 De lete 5 Display 6 Print rules 7 Work with rules 8 Print results 9 Hork with results Opt Proc Type Description Objects Analyzed _ 1 FILE Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search DM DEMOL IB ALL 2 PGM Find all price amp amount fields DM DEMOL IB ALL _ 3 FILE Phone Log App Locate Cust ID usage LG LIB ALL F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fi2 Cancel Bottom Fi4 Submitted jobs F21 Report Menu B gt 3 40 3 40 Ho IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 11 1 Explanation of Panel The panel above includes 3 examples of extended field analyses In this case the first and last are over the files in a library and the second is over the programs in the first lib Below is an overview of how to create a field analysis and on the next page are descriptions of the function keys and options on this panel Steps to Creating a Field Analysis The extended field analysis functions rely on the internal cross reference files built by Docu Mint through the standard Mark Lib Library Analysis commands Before you can analyze a set of files or programs you must first mark the libraries and run the STRLIBANZ command over them Note that in order to use the extended field analy
5. Option 2 Indent CL Source The Indent CL Source option produces an indented listing of a CLP source member The list will identify related DO ENDDO commands connecting them with a separator character and indenting any commands nested within the DO ENDDO pair When you run the INDCLSRC command the panel below is presented ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Indent CL Source INDCLSRC Type choices press Enter Source member ww wee Name Source file QCLSRC Name Library 1 ee eee LIBL Name LIBL Starting sequence number FIRST Number xFIRST Ending sequence number xLAST Number LAST Indent symbol saasaa L Character value Output 2 eee ee ee x PRINT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys rK gt 5 37 5 37 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 8 3 Type a CL source member and file name If you wish you can also specify starting and ending sequence number and add your own indention symbol Chapter 8 Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities 125 Below is a sample of the output from this command 0565 0 0566 0 0567 0 0568 0 0569 0570 00 0571 00 0572 0573 00 0574 00 0575 00 0576 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0577 0 0576 0 0579 0 0580 0581 00 Figure 8 4 IF RSELECT
6. cece cece cence eee kaar ES 191 PGM Analysis Reports creser e rudere seis See Wedel y og EERE EEES oes ees 193 6 Table of Contents Section 12 A FILE Analysis Reports 0 0c cece cece cece eee 195 Detail listing of selected and or omitted fields by file DM 307 195 Summary listing of selected files DM 310 0 cece eee 196 File program impact analysis summary DM 311 0008 197 Analysis Select Omit Rules Listing DM 306 000 0 ce eee eee ee 198 Section 10 B PGM Analysis Reports 00 0 cece cece cece eee ee 199 Detail listing of selected omitted fields by program DM 308 199 Program Display file work sheet impact summary FLDTOFLD 201 Program Display file change requirements work sheet FLDTOFLD 203 Analysis select omit rules listing DM 306 0 0 e eee eee 204 Chapter 13 DOCU MINT COMMAND REFERENCE ccccccccccccccscccececscesesssssseseees 207 GHGDOCGTE Command ss Tietes are Ere TER E baw bear ee ieote ett ees ates 207 CHGDOCDFT Commandes eesse iremen ccc ccc cence nen eens 208 CHGLIBATR Command 0 0 209 CLRPGMXREF Command 00 ccc cece cece een enn eee eees 211 CMPPGMDBF Command 0 0c ccc cece cece eee e ees 212 CMPPGMINE Command 00 ec c ccc ceee ete nee es 213 DBFFLDXREF Command 0 0 c cece eee eee eee ees 215 DBFLAY Commands lt n is
7. 2 7 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 10 1 Explanation of Options DOCOB Document Objects The Document Objects command and related commands DOCCMD DOCFILE DOCMENU DOCPGM DOCPROC DOCQRY DOCUSRPRE DOCMODULE and DOCSRVPGM initiates an analysis of an object or group of objects of a single type within a library The same degree of analysis is done as that produced by the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command the difference being that all objects requested by a DOCxxx command will be analyzed even if the object was successfully analyzed previously and has not been changed or recompiled since When you select the DOCOBJ option the panel below is displayed ifm 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Document Object DOCOBJ Type choices press Enter Object s cura i Name genericx ALL Library a eee Name xCURLIB Object type 2 eae ALL ALRTBL AUTL Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Library 2 ee eee Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys rK gt 5 37 5 37 Kb IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nu 5 Figure 10 2 Explanation of Panel Enter the object name and library Valid values for the object name are the actual name ALL or a generic va
8. After you create an analysis entry and define the select omit rules you can use option 1 to run the analysis Running an analysis does not yield any output After the analysis is complete use options 8 and 9 to print and or work with the results 2 Change Use option 2 to work with an analysis entry If you select this option for a PGM analysis you can work with the associated FILE analyses at the panel presented The panel for creating and working with analysis entries is described in the next section 3 Copy You can use option 3 to copy an analysis entry along with the sets of select omit rules defined for it After copying an entry you can then modify it and it s defined rule sets Copying an analysis does not copy the analysis results 4 Delete Select option 4 to delete an analysis it s associated select omit rules results and FILE cross reference entries 5 Display Use option 5 to display the attributes of an analysis 6 Print Rules Use option 6 to print the field select omit rules associated with an analysis 7 Work with Rules Select option 7 to work with the field select omit rules for an analysis Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 159 8 Print Results Use option 8 to print the results of an analysis The results are generated using option 1 from this panel 9 Work with Results Option 9 presents a panel from which you can work with the results of the latest execution of an analysis You can
9. DLTOM Used to indicate whether or not an object s master record in file DOBJMP should be deleted if the object is no longer found in the library during a library analysis Normally this value would be YES but could be set to NO if you want to keep a history of any objects that have been in the library Valid entries for this parameter are NO YES or SAME ACTION The ACTION parm indicates what action to take if the library is selected by the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command This parameter value is the same value as that used by the Mark Library MRKLIB command Valid entries for this parameter are LOAD REMOVE NONE or SAME This attribute will automatically be reset to NONE by a successful run of Start Library Analysis RMVLVL The Remove Level parm specifies to what level records are to be removed from the cross reference files during an ACTION REMOVE A value of XREF will remove object cross reference records but leave the object master record in file DOBJMP A value of ALL will remove both cross reference records and the object master record removing all traces of the object from Docu Mint files 210 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference CLRPGMXREF Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIBRARY Library the X Ref records will be Library name cleared for RGXPFM Reorganize X Ref file YES NO JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The STRLIBANZ command cont
10. _ FILE PF STRSEU SRCFILE amp srclib amp f SRCMBR amp srcmbr OPTION 2 _ FILE PRTF STRSEU SRCFILE amp srclib amp f SRCMBR amp srcmbr OPTION 2 _ JOBD CHGJOBD JOBD amp 1 amp n _ JOBQ WRKJOBQ JOBO amp amp n _ JRN CHGJRN JRN amp 1 amp n More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fi2 Cancel LE gt 10 3 103 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 4 11 You can use the Page Up and Page Down keys to roll through this list or type an object type in the position to field to go directly to a specific entry For object types with multiple attributes for example FILE you can also type the object attribute in the position to field to further refine your search The options shown here are a subset of all the entries in the Docu Mint options control file If you want to work with the full list of options available in the software you can press F17 Config Menu from the Work with System Libraries screen to present the Docu Mint Configuration Menu From that menu you can select option 13 Maintain Options Control File to work with the complete list The options control maintenance interface is described in detail in the section Option 13 Maintain the Options Control File on page 141 Press F6 to create new entries or use option 2 to work with the existing ones Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 81 Here is an illustration of the panel presented when you work with an exist
11. fields 13 23 KF IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 Use option 4 to omit the field TQTY and TSEQ After you select an option 4 for each of those records press F8 to view the omitted records Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 39 If you mistakenly omitted a field that you DID want to include you can just toggle to display the list of omitted fields above at right and select an option 4 Select field Press Enter to continue Then press Enter once more from your list of fields to return to the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel Now we re going to create a PGM analysis based on this FILE analysis The PGM analysis will identify which programs and source specs need to be changed to accommodate the new price and amount field formats Press F6 to im 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E ioi xj Fie Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help create a new Work With FILE Analysis Cross Reference analysis and at PGM Analysis Information z Analysis process number 2 the window Analysis description i Analysis type gt PGM presented enter Program mame 2 2 eee ALL Program name GENERIC ALL a type of PGM ETIP o oea ae SG ae we DM DEMOLIB Library name Associated FILE Analysis References and press Enter Type options press Enter At right is the 1 Attach to PGM analysis 4 Detach S Display a Opt Proc Descriptio
12. of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Change Session Defaults WHUF 18 01 Type choices press Enter Library list IJOB Name JOB F4 List F6 Edit Indent pattern a a aaa Lil BLANK pattern Columns to indent 2 1 2 3 Screen size 4 3 24x80 4 27x132 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Fi Subset F18 Change Docu Mint defaults K gt 5 39 5 39 KO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 9 Explanation of Panel The Library list prompt causes the list to be rebuilt if the value is changed The next two prompts Indent pattern and Columns to indent change the appearance of the information appearing in the list without rebuilding the list The final prompt Screen size appears only if the workstation you are using is capable of supporting a 27 by 132 character display Type 3 to select a 24 by 80 screen size 4 to select a 27 by 132 screen size Changing the screen size does not cause the list to be rebuilt You can reach the Change Session Defaults display may be reached by pressing F18 from either the main Used Objects list or the Subset Work with Where Used display Chapter 6 Menu DM 0BJ Object Cross Reference 105 Function Keys F4 List Presents a display that allows you to select a named library list from a list of predefined library lists For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with L
13. 6E 1 AND amp SELECT LE 9 AND SCHDREH THEN DO CHEUAR INGO t SNOPGHHSG HSGIDCON 0013 HSGF GN ISGF TOPGHO SAHE KEWAR SHSGKEY Invalid option GOTO SOSPHS6S ENODO DJK 020196 OPT 4 IS VALID ONLY IF IND 58 IS ON GNHCSLIB AHEAD OF GN LIB RINS8 ME 1 THEN OO IF 8SELECT Q 4 THEN D0 CHGVAR am 1 SNOPGHHSG HSGID GNHO013 HSGFCGNHHSGF TOPGHOLSAHE KEWAR RHSGKEY Invalid option GOTO SOSPHSGS E 000 fx IF ENODO be IF l El Option 3 Indent RPG Source The Indent RPG Source command produces an indented listing of an RPG or RPGLE source member The list will identify related DOxxx END DO IFxx END IF and SELEC WHxx END SL operation codes connecting them with a separator character and indenting any statements within the structured code The panel below is presented when you run the INDRPGSRC command w 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal oy x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Type choices Source member ww wwe i Name Source file QRPGSRC Name Library 2 2 eee eee LIBL Name LIBL Source member type RPG RPG RPGLE Starting sequence number xFIRST Number CALCS FIRST Ending sequence number LAST Number LAST Indent symbol Colums to indent 2 0 5 x Output F3 Exit F4 Prom
14. DDORDD DM DEMOL IB PGM RPGLE 1462272 Bytes OPGMR __ DDORDD DM DEMOLIB SRCM RPGLE QRPGLESRC 2556 Records This panel _ DDORDDFM DMHDEMOL 1B F ILE DSPF 24576 Bytes QPGMR displays a list of gt More Sp ays SO F2 Main menu F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh all the objects F6 Docobj menu F8 0ptions config Fe3 More opts F24 More keys and source B 7 TF members in the 32 oe IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 selected library DM DEMOLIB The WWO screen also supports a 132 column display if your emulation is set up that way From here you can select from a number of options related to cross referencing programs files and other objects on your system As with the WWL panel options those available on this screen are a hybrid of PDM and Docu Mint functions To see exactly what each option does you can press F8 Options config from this screen From the panel presented you can review or change the existing options or even add new ones of your own Of particular interest are the Docu Mint WRKWHRUSE and WRKUSEOBJ commands as well as the option 10 shortcut to analyze changed objects individually 30 Section Installation and Tutorial Position the list to the object DMCOMB of Type choices press Enter type PGM Parent object gt DMCOMP PRV ALL name generic EINA sa see ta i 8 Jee oe os gt DM DEMOLIB PRV ALL name RPGLE and Parent object type gt PGM PRV ALL CMD MENU l
15. Database File Field Xref DBFFLDXREF Type choices press Enter File mame o cur ae dea a I Name genericx ALL Library 2 ee ee eee Name LIBL CURLIB Field name 4 ALL Name generic ALL for more values Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE xUSRPRF Library o eeraa ee Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 Ko IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 7 4 Refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference for a complete description of all the DBFFLDXREF parameters On the next page is a sample of the output from this command Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 115 This illustration below is of a report over the library LG LIB a phone log application looking for the field LDLODT log date M 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal iol x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Spooled File File a e OSYSPRT Page Line 1 2 Control Coluxns 1 130 Find 2 ee TTET ET P E E E T E S T E E T TTE LTEN Kirsh E TTE l Docu Hint ROS H02 Business Conputer Design 1999 11 15 10 51 35 Page 1 Database File Field Cross Reference Requested files LGgLIB ALL Requested fields LOLODT Buffer File Fornat Field Attr Fron To Nave Nave LOLOOT P6 0 1 4 LGHCSTF ALGHCSTF Log Date P 8 0 1 5 LGWOETF R
16. FILE and PGM This values is selected at a previous prompt window and cannot be changed from this panel Object Name and Library Type the name of the file object to run the analysis over Valid values are as follows a An existing file name a A generic value such as LG to analyze all files beginning with the characters LG in the selected library a ALL to analyze all the files in the selected library Analysis Results The bottom portion of this panel displays the results of the last time the analysis was run The information available includes the date and time as well the number of fields selected and explicitly omitted Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 161 Working with FILE Analysis Rules After you have created a FILE analysis entry you can select option 7 from the Work With Extended Field and Program Analysis panel Figure 11 1 to define and work with field selection rules This panel is also presented automatically after a FILE analysis entry is created The panel presented is similar to the one shown below 421302 L 4 x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work With SELECT Rule Detail Analysis 1 Analyze files in LG LIB Objects analyzed ALL LG LIB Sequence number Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 Delete 5 Display Opt Seq Property Rel Rule details 1 xATR xEQ 6 0 N 2 COLHDG xCT Start in colum 1 date Date DATE YYMM 3 EDTCDE EQ
17. For a complete description of all the command parameters please refer to the section WRKWHRUSE or WWU Command on page 247 of Section V Docu Mint Command Reference The next section describes how to work with the WWU output 74 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Using the Work with Where Used Display This section describes the various elements of the Work with Where Used list display Below is a sample of the output when running the WWU command over the program GN HLP Ibm 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Conputer Design HHUDS4 01 Hork nith Hhere Used Type options press Enter 2 Edit Copy Delete S Display Renane amp 8 Display description 10 Docunent 11 Hove 12 Hork Hith Opt Object Library Type Attr Seq Usage Text Child Library GNHHLP PGH CNP PGH RPG Child ProGen Plus c 1988 99 Excelsystens rel 5 028 __ LALTSHNT DHWLIB 4PGH APG 1816 00 CALL Docu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GNHHLP _ 1 BLO XGPL 4PGH APGLE 1910 00 CALL Haintain Install Control File GHaHLP __ BKPHNU XGPL 4PGH APG 566 00 CALL Backup Henu GHaHLP _ DBH034 DeaLIB 4PGH APG 2274 00 CALL ObGen c 1992 99 ExcelSystens Rel 2 20R GNaHLP __ DB OBHLIB 4PGH RPG 2018 00 CALL ObGen c 1992 99 ExcelSystens Rel 2 20R GN HLP __ De OBHLIB 4PGH RPG 1756 00 CALL ObGen c 1992 99 ExcelSystens Rel 2 20R GN HLP __ DBHO4 OBHLIB 4PGH RPG 13
18. That means that in the example above all fields that are 6 0 N will be selected regardless of whether field name includes the text Dat From this panel you can also press F21 to print a list of your Select and Omit rules 180 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions PGM Analysis Rules When you press F6 to define new rules for a PGM analysis the window below is presented Select Field Property Property 1 Select Opt Property Description ATR Field attributes length decimals type xCONSTANT Constant name xNAME Field name xQNAME Qualified field name file lib field xTYPE Field type Fi2 Cance I Figure 11 17 Five types of PGM rules are currently supported These are a ATR Checks field attributes including field length decimals or type CONSTANT Searching each line of code for a constant value NAME Checking the field name for specified characters QNAME Adding specific fields to the selection TYPE Selecting certain field types oO o oO O After you choose the rule type another window comes up to confirm your rule selection The ATR NAME QNAME and TYPE Select rules are also used by FILE analyses and are described in a previous section of this chapter The CONSTANT rule is described below Note that if you have selected a FILE analysis to link to defining rules for your PGM analysis is optional Ifa FILE analysis has been attached then the PGM will pull i
19. analysis rules 167 Edit Word analysis rules 168 Errors changed ILE module libs 56 CPF4102 errors 54 working with analysis errors 49 54 Excess Records clearing from internal files 211 Extended Field Analysis PGM results 183 Extended Field Analysis Functions overview 155 Extended Field Analysis Reports 191 F Field Where Used Information 176 Field Analysis overview of steps 157 Field Name analysis rule 169 Field Text analysis rule 171 Field Type analysis rule 172 Field Type Attributes analysis rules 165 Field Usage Codes in extended field analysis results 176 Fields Affected By This Field 185 list 189 Fields That Affect This Field 184 list 188 FILE Analysis overview 155 File and Data Usage abbreviations used in reports 24 File Documentation Menu 147 FILE Field Analysis Entries creating and changing 160 File Field Cross Reference Report 115 File Field Analysis where used info 176 Files clearing excess records from internal files 211 including logical view info in WWU re sults 247 Filter Inp Usage 177 Filter Duplicate Programs 177 finding character strings 124 flagging libraries for analysis 86 FLDTOFLD 201 203 Function Keys common to Docu Mint displays 22 Index 253 G Groups creating library groups 133 library 209 Headers default company setting 132 HILITE 223 IFxx END 126 ILE Module Library Changes adding alternate references 56 INDCLSRC 149 command reference 220 Indent CL Sour
20. as a search criteria If you select CT Docu Mint will check for the entered edit word from the start column to the end of the entry There are few situation in which CT would be appropriate for this option Start Column When using EDTWRD the start column should generally be 1 Search Criteria On this line you can enter one or more edit words to be searched for These must be enclosed in single quotes with one space between multiple entries as illustrated in the example above 168 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions NAME Selection Field Name When you build a rule of type NAME a panel similar to the one below is presented 21302 olx Eile Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work With Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule Analysis 4 Initial analysis of programs in GN LIB Property NAME Condition SEL SELECT Sequence Type information press Enter Relationship EQ EQ CT Start Colum 61 Search criteria JBDT TIME DT E F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel 16 48 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 16 48 Oe 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM H Figure 11 9 Relationship Two relationships can be defined in NAME rules EQ and CT If you select EQ Docu Mint will evaluate each field name beginning with the column specified for the number of spaces of each field name or portion of a fi
21. on F10 Reorganize physical file member YES NO FLDXRF on F10 Include extended field X Ref data YES NO JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Start Library Analysis command is used to initiate an analysis of objects and source members within a library This command is used in conjunction with the Mark Library MRKLIB command which is used to flag one or more libraries to be analyzed Once all libraries to be analyzed have been marked the Start Library Analysis command can now be executed to begin an analysis of the requested libraries Only objects that have been created or changed since the last analysis will be considered for analysis This means your first analysis of a library may take some time but subsequent runs will finish much faster After the library analysis completes cross reference data is available for Docu Mint s displays and reports Please note that this command does not produce a report It s function is to maintain the cross reference files used by the various Docu Mint on line and reporting modules The Object Analysis Errors Report PRTANZERR or the System Object Directory SYSOBJDIR may be used after the library analysis 238 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference to determine if Docu Mint had any difficulties in analyzing the requested libraries After running the Start Library Analysis command you need to check the analysis errors report to verify that all objects in the lib
22. please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Option 2 Work with Used Objects The Work with Used Objects option provides you with a list interface to the objects used by commands menus procedures programs modules service programs queries and user profiles on your system Work with Used Objects WUO allows you to work with lists representing the flow of work on your system From these lists you can perform operations such as copy delete edit and rename Below is an illustration of the options presented when you run the Work with Used Objects ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ojx Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Used Objects WRKUSEOBJ Type choices press Enter Parent object PRV xPRV ALL name xgener icx Library s ocs ee ee te xPRY PRYV ALL name Parent object type PRYV PRV ALL CMD MENU Display generic usage xPRY xPRY ALL DLT xEXC Display child object type xPRY PRYV xALL xtype Display child object type ALL PRY PRYV YES NO Display child object type VAR PRV PRV VYES NO Library list xPRY xPRY JOB name Treat blank library name as xPRY PRV name LIBL CURLIB Treat variable ibrary name as PRYV PRV name LIBL CURLIB Display library name xPRY PRV ACTUAL RESOLVE Maximum explosion level 1 x xNOMAX 0 99 Indent pat
23. the panel below is presented ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Type choices press Enter Child object xPRY xPRY ALL name gener icx Child object type xPRY PRV ALL type Library list PRV ALL PRV JOB name Indent pattern xPRY xPRY pattern Columns to indent xPRY xPRV 1 2 3 DURDUR o a oir oe cs a Sei na ar A x PRINT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys 5 x Hork with Where Used HHU rK gt 537 KO Figure 6 6 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet The only required command parameters are the child object and object type For a complete description of all the command parameters please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference The next section describes how to work with the WWU output Chapter 6 Menu DM OBJ Object Cross Reference 101 Using the Work with Where Used Display This section describes the various elements of the Work with Where Used list display Below is a sample of the output when running the WWU command over the program GN HLP ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Conputer Design HUODS4 01 Hork Hith Used Objects Type options press Enter 2 Edit 3 C
24. 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu HM int Subset Hork with Where Used WHUF 17 01 Type choices press Enter Child object GN HLP xALL name gener icx Child object type PGM xALL xtype Maximum explosion level 76 NOMAX number F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Change defaults K gt 5 37 5 37 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 4 8 The default values are those selected the last time the command was executed F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 77 Using the Change Session Defaults Display The Change Session Defaults panel allows you to make changes to the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the main where used list With the exception of the Screen size each prompt on the Change Session Defaults display corresponds to a parameter of the WRKWHRUSE command For a complete description of the WWU command parameters please refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 This is the Change Session Defaults panel for the WWU command ifm 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Windo
25. 50 CMPPGMINF executing from the WWL panel 50 running from the WWO panel 64 Column Heading analysis rules 166 Command Reference 207 Common Function Keys 22 Compare Program Information see CMPPGMINF Compiling Objects from WWO 65 Configuration Menu 131 Constant Name PGM analysis rule 182 Control Data changing 132 252 Index CPF4102 Analysis Errors Analysis Errors 54 CPF4102 Source not found 54 CPYLIB 48 Creating a PGM Analysis 178 Cross Reference Files 86 maintaining and updating 145 D DBFFLDXREF command reference 215 Database File Field Cross Reference Re port 115 using the command 115 DBFLAYO command reference 216 Database File Layouts 147 Default Company Setting changing 132 Default source file 209 Defining Extended Analysis Rules 162 DLIBCP 92 DM 306 198 204 DM 307 195 DM 308 199 DM 310 196 DM 311 197 DM ANZ 145 DM CFG 131 DM FILE 147 DM FLD 112 DM LIB 85 DM MENU 148 DM PGM 149 DM UTL 123 DO ENDDO commands 125 DOCFILE Document Files 147 DOCMENU Document Menus 148 DOCOBJ 146 DOCOB or DOCxxx command reference 218 running from the WWO panel 64 Docu Mint Control Data changing 207 Docu Mint Defaults changing 208 Docu Mint Terminology 23 Docu Mint Utilities Menu 123 DOCxxx Commands 146 DOPTCP options control file 143 DOxxx END 126 DSPF PRTF Usage 187 in PGM analysis 184 DSPFLAYO command reference 219 Display File Layouts 148 Duplicate Programs filtering in an analysis 177 Edit Code
26. Analyzed Objects 67 Using the Work with Used Objects Display Below is a sample of the output for WUO object command when run over the program GN G01 in GN LIB with a maximum explosion level of 3 ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Conputer Design HUODS4 01 Hork Hith Used Objects Type options press Enter 2 Edit 3 Copy Delete S Display Renake 8 Display description 10 Docunent 1 Hove 12 Hork nith Opt Object Library Type Attr Seq Usage Text Gener ic GNyGO1 GH IB PeH ALL Nall GNHLIB PGH RPGLE Parent ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R GNHGO1 GN LIB H0DULE BOUND Hodule not found on syste COPY GHaSZSUPR GNHSRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Zero suppress routine RPGHOD COPY GNHGOISAY GNHLIB SRUPGH RPGL BOUND Proen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R REF 1 GNa601h50 GN LIB AHODULE BOUND Hodule not found on syster aCOPY 1 GNa601h51 GH SRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Is flid PGHFIELD If so return int naie RPGHOD COPY _ 11 GHaFPPL1 GNaLIB FILE LF 18 00 INP ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystes rel 5 022 0CLF GNa601h52 GHYSRC iODULE RPGL BOUND Functions for Hork fields RPGHOD COPY GNg601H53 GHySRC iODULE RPGL BOUND Retrieve existing generated code to Hrite RPGHOD COPY __ 1 GNabOTHS4 GHySRC 4HODULE RPGL BOUND Open and access Texplate Attributes file RPGHOD 4
27. Database File Layouts command produces a report listing file and field information including File Attribute Information Field Attribute Information Type physical or logical Field names Description Attributes character numeric binary packed etc Record format File buffer positions Access path Usage input output both neither Select omit logical files only Description Based on files logical files only Reference fields Dependent files physical files only The Database File Layouts report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 2 from Docu Mint menu DM FILE a Execute command DBFLAYO from a command line Command Parameters FILE Specify the files to include on the report This parameter can accept a single file name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry must be a valid library name FILETYPE The File Type parameter controls whether the files specified in the File FILE parameter should be limited to physical files only PF logical files only LF or all database files DBF JOBD The name of the job description to run the report under This parm can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRE The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the special value NONE is not recommended 216 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Databas
28. F10 F11 Prev Next view Use these function keys to toggle through the different views of your object Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 65 F12 Cancel Press F12 to return to the previous screen F13 Field analysis F13 presents the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel From here you can define analysis rules designed to find references to specific fields or types of fields in your files and programs F14 WrkSbmJob Press F14 to run the WRKSBMBJOB command F15 View Print Err Press F15 to work with the Analysis Error results for this library 66 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects The Work with Used Objects Command The frequently used Work with Used Objects option provides you with a list interface to the objects used by commands menus procedures programs modules service programs queries and user profiles on your system Work with Used Objects WUO allows you to work with lists representing the flow of work on your system From these lists you can perform operations such as copy delete edit and rename Below is an illustration of the options presented when you select Work with Used Objects command from the Work with Analyzed Objects panel ifm 270 Screen Shots Session tsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E Aa x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work with Used Objects WRKUSEOBJ Type choices press Enter Parent object gt DporpD PRV ALL name generi
29. F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 0mitted Reds F9 File Fields only More included 1n our Fi0 View by Field Fi2 Cancel F20 Print results F21 Print Work Sheet PGM analysis gt 4 29 Because you 4 23 gt IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 arent familiar with the sample files and programs the information shown here probably isn t completely meaningful to you Once you are done with this exercise we recommend you duplicate the steps with some of your own files then spend some time here familiarizing yourself with the info presented This panel is described in Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions To conclude this exercise we are going to print the work sheet of our results The work sheet identifies what programs and specific source specs need to be changed Press F21 Print Work Sheet from the panel above When you do so Program Impact Analysis Reporting the report prompt l l Analysis number 2 Find all price amp amount field is shown as at Object library DM DEMOLIB 1 Type information press Enter right From program Program name ALL To program Program name In this instance Report detail 1 Detail report including gt source code impact analysis we ll accept the 2 Summary report of affected r programs defaults which is 3 Field drill down level 1 to 999 or NOMAX to print a detail Lines per page 59 1 to 99 report with BERNT NOMAX as the drill down level Chapter
30. G01 xALL name gener icx Library ss sv esa ee ae GN LIB ALL name Parent object type PGH x ALL CMD MENU PGM Display generic usage ALL x ALL ALC DLT EXC Display child object type ALL xALL type Display child object type xALL xNO VES NO Display child object type VAR YES x VES NO Maximum explosion level 3 NOMAX number F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Change defaults rK gt 5 37 5 37 kD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 4 The command parameters shown above represent a subset of those available when you initially run the WRKUSEOBJ command and are described in detail in Section V Docu Mint Command Reference F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information 98 Section III Menu Reference Using the Change Session Defaults Display The Change Session Defaults display allows you to change the parameters controlling the appearance of the information in the main Used Objects list With the exception of Screen size each prompt on the Change Session Defaults display corresponds to a parameter of the WRKUSEOBJ command These are described in detail in Section V Docu Mint Command Reference under the WRKUSEOBJ command entry The Change Session Defaults display may be reached b
31. Keep in mind that even though you may have errors Docu Mint still analyzes everything that it does find Depending on the type of analysis errors you get you may choose to disregard them or go back and fix them by moving things around or recompiling or defining alternate source references and rerun your analysis If you do rerun the analysis it will only analyze objects and source that failed previously it will not reanalyze the entire library The section below describes how to mark and analyze a library and then check your results Loading and Maintaining the Docu Mint Cross Reference Files Below are some simple instructions for getting started with Docu Mint The Quick Start exercise in the next chapter also covers these steps and illustrates them as well To get started with Docu Mint type aDDLIBLE DM LIB and press Enter to add the product library DM4LIB to your library list Then run the command STRDOC If you are running under a trial period security code the Docu Mint splash screen pops up this can be turned off from the cxcpoccTL command once you get your permanent code Press Enter once more to present the Work with System Libraries panel from which you can execute all the options required to mark and analyze libraries and work with the results of the analysis Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions 17 Below is an illustration of the Work with System Libraries panel zix Fi
32. Keyword Description PGM JOBD Batch job description This message is generated when the source associated with an object description was not found This message indicates the object s source has been changed since the object was created This message is generated when the object s source member name does not match the object name This could be used to identify renamed objects This message identifies possible alternate source members for the listed object Valid values Name of programs to include in report Program name GENERIC ALL USRPRF Valid job description The Program Explosion Report command produces two reference reports listing CL and RPG programs The first report explodes the source of CL and RPG programs The second report is a directory to the first report giving an alphabetical list of programs and the page of the first report that the program may be found on The amount of information shown is based on the following guidelines a Ifa CL program executes a non IBM command the command processing program for the command will be exploded a CL programs will be entirely exploded 230 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference a RPG program explosions will list only File specifications and CALL statements Programs called within RPG programs will be exploded according to their type a Other program types will list only the program and the fact that it is being called The Program Explosion Report
33. QCLSRC SRCDAT T QNAME EQ LG LIB QCMDSRC SRCDAT T QNAME EQ LG LIB QDDSSRC SRCDAT T QNAME EQ LG LIB QRPGSRC SRCDAT 198 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions DATE Contact Page 1 Section 10 B PGM Analysis Reports This section of the Docu Mint User s Guide includes samples of each of the reports that can be generated for FILE analyses Detail listing of selected omitted fields by program DM 308 This report includes all the fields in the PGM analysis including both selected and omitted fields if required in this example we have only included selected fields 10 29 97 16 01 11 PGM Analysis File Field Listing by Program Selected Fields Only Page 1 From program A To program Z Analysis 2 PGM Analyze programs in LG LIB Date analyzed 2007 10 21 Objects LG LIB ALL File FieldAttributesField text Rule Applied to This Record Program LG BO1 Collect Contact Stats Selected fields INTERNAL LVO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL LVO3 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL LVO4 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL U TM 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL UMDY 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 LDA WKOO2 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 LDA WKOO3 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 LG DETL3 LDLCDT6 0 P Log Close Date ATR EQ 6 0 N LG DETL3 LDLODT 6 0 PLog Date ATR EQ 6 0 N PSDS JBDT 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 PSDS TIME 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 Number of Selected fields 11 Program LG B04 Batch file
34. Store value for SFLOPT in array to process in SSFOPT 0872 00 UAL Hite 1 0873 00 C zRo OOKUP S tlh tend 0874 00 t TF IN41 ON If found 0875 00 c HOVE ASURRNBR SCHE then store 0876 00 t HOVEL BSUSFLOP SHH in elenent 0877 00 t EVAL OSFLNATCH ON 0878 00 HOVEL BASFLRCD SRECKA 0879 00 Cx Set value for naninun of SFLOPT selections to process 0880 00 IF Hit gt SHAHH 0881 00 EVAL SHARE Hit 0882 00 t ENDIF 0883 00 c NOIF SFLOPT Valid 0884 00 c DIF 0885 00 x 0886 00 C If no prior errors set the change flag off 0887 00 c IF GBGNERRSTS lt gt ON 0888 00 C AND SUSFLOP 0889 00 c EVAL BASFLNKTCH 0FF SFLNATCHG OFF 0890 00 NDIF Fo Exit FS Refresh F9 Retrieve Fll Cursor Fll Toggle F12 Cancel Fib Repeat find Fe4store keys EB 4 1 41 Kb IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 7 Figure 8 6 In this example the character is used to mark the indention of the structures Chapter 8 Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities 127 Option 4 Edit Local Data Area The Edit Local Data Area option LDA command allows you to view the LDA contents and modify the local data area and job switches from a display file rather than making a blind change through the Change Data Area command The LDA command is easy to invoke from a command line and can be easily called from a program as a useful debugging tool When you select the LDA option a panel similar to the one below
35. Terminal o AAK Display Spooled File 1 3 1 130 Page L ine Columns File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help File OSYSPRT Control 2 Find E TET TE E AR PRN TERE E E R 11 02 01 13 15 32 Object Library W_ALINTRA Object Nane ALL Print Unused objects report Object Type ALL Object Object Object Object Object Hane Library Type Attribute text ALIST MALINTA Poh APOE List of Itens at Auction 7 BCOINQOI H KLINTRA PGH RPGLE ESDI Log Inquiry CALING H KLINTRA PGH RPGLE Select a Day Fron Calendar Inage DTCATHNT H HLINTRA POH RPGLE lork ith Date Categor ies ESDITEST H ALINTRA PGH RPGLE ExcelSystens Hone Page HARDIN H KLINTRA PGH RPGLE Harduare Inventory Haintenance HHTEST H KLINTRA PGH RPGLE Test Henu HNTEST2 W_RLINTRA PGH RPGLE est Henu HS DETL H KLINTRA FILE PF Harduare Details HS INTH H KLINTRA FIL PF internal Harduare List HS NTINF M KLINTRA FIL PF Netuork Info IN CONT H KLINTRA POH RPGLE ESDI Phone and Contact Listing TN_DEVSCH H KLINTRA PGH RPGLE leveloper Support Schedule IN LNKFSU H KLINTRA FIL PF SDI Intranet Heb page links Hore F3 Enit Fl Cancel Flg Left Fe0 Right Fe4store keys E 3 22 3 22 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 13 The report created by the PRTUNUSOB lists the object name library type attribute and text for any objects found but not referenced In the example above the report was run over
36. be used in conjunction with the MRKLIB command which flags the libraries to be analyzed Once you have marked all the libraries that need to be analyzed you can execute the Start Library Analysis command to begin an analysis of the requested libraries When you select menu option 2 or run the STRLIBANZ command the panel below is presented F10 has been pressed to show the additional parameters ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ Type choices press Enter Library or Group to analyze Name ALL T p s o saora a d a a xLIB xGRP LIB for more values LIB Include ibraries with action LOR oa aw Bi ta ands e a xYES NO xYES Remove oe aa xYES xNO x YES No action NO NO xLOAD REMOVE Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Library 2 eee Name LIBL CURLIB Reorganize Docu Mint Files NO NO YES Include extended field xref x YES NO xYES Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nu 2 Figure 5 3 The STRLIBANZ command requires a library or library group name You can also analyze multiple libraries at once by typing a where indicated then entering the additional library names PLL To group libraries
37. built over the physical file child shown in the Object column Library Displays the library name of the child used in this particular reference Function Keys F16 Position to Toggles between positioning the display between the top and bottom of the list F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display below for further information F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information 76 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects F21 Print list Prints the current form of the list Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display The Subset Work with Where Used display allows you to make changes to the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the main where used list After making any changes and pressing Enter the list is rebuilt based on the new selection criteria Each prompt on the Subset Work with Where Used display corresponds to a parameter of the WRKWHRUSE command The Subset Work with Where Used display can be reached by pressing F17 from either the main Where Used list or the Change Session Defaults display Below is an illustration of the panel presented ifm 2129 Session
38. button When the upload finishes the activity log will display the message File upload complete You can then close the FTP utility 4 Logon to an IBM i session as secoFR and execute the command BCDINSTALL BCDINSTALL At the screen presented select option 1 next to the product Docu Mint and press Enter to install The installation process restores the Docu Mint install library named DM INST Once restored the installation process automatically continues with the next steps 5 The install will ask if you want to restore the Docu Mint S 36 environment Choose Y only if you need this feature Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions 15 6 As the last step you are prompted for your security code Type your code and press Enter If you had a previous version of Docu Mint installed on your system Release V6R5M0 displays your existing security code on the panel If the prompt displays A1A1A1A1A1A1 you need to enter your permanent license key or a trial period security code to evaluate the software Please call BCD at 630 986 0800 or your local software distributor 7 To start Docu Mint add DM LIB to your library list and type the command sTRDOC Confirm your activation status in the upper right corner of the Work with System Libraries screen If your activation status is EXPIRED you need a new security code You can get this from BCD or your local distributor To enter the security code run the command activate
39. command to add a library to a group or press F6 to present the Work with Library Groups panel This screen is described on page 82 Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 51 F7 RSHLIBCTL The Refresh Library Control File command updates the list of libraries available to work with at the Work with System Libraries screen F8 Options config Press F8 to view and work with the default options and functions available at the WWL screen Refer to the section The Work with Used Objects Command on page 67 below for further information on this feature F9 Retrieve Press F9 to retrieve the last commands executed from the command line at the foot of this panel F10 Lib Menu Press F10 to present the menu DM LIB from which you can mark and analyze libraries and refresh the library count and control files This menu is also available by selecting option 1 from the Docu Mint Main Menu For a detailed description of the menu DM LIB please refer to Chapter 5 Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis F12 Cancel Press F12 to cancel out of Docu Mint F13 Object menu F13 presents the Object Cross Reference menu DM OB J from which you can select the commonly used Work with Where Used and Work with Used Object commands in addition to a few others Most of the options on that menu are also available as options from the Work with Analyzed Objects panel For a detailed description of the menu DM OBj please refer to Chapter 6 Menu DM 0B
40. different views with different sets of details on the objects shown above From the list above you can type a new library name in the upper left to switch to seeing objects in a different lib or you can also type the special value ALL to see a record of all objects that Docu Mint has analyzed in all libraries Below is a description of the information available on the WWO panel in all the different views followed by explanations of all the options and functions available for working with your object lists Object Information Available at the WWO Panel Some of the object details below require that in order to see them you press F10 or F11 to toggle the panel view Object Library The object name and library Type Attr This column displays a composite of the object type and any additional attributes that are relevant For example if the object is of type PGM the additional attributes will show whether it s a CL RPG or RPGLE program If the object is of type FILE the attribute extension shows whether it is a physical logical or source file etc Src File The Work with Analyzed Objects screen shows source members in addition to actual objects This column lists the source file in which the source member is found Text The object or source member text description Size The size in bytes for objects and records for source of the entry Owner This is the object owner Object Source Section This additional set
41. displayed by this command is constrained by the amount of information available from analyzed libraries For example if you check the usage of an object that is called from a library that has not been analyzed Docu Mint will not display any usage records for that object Your other option is to use the PRTORPHOBJ report which builds a complete list of object usage records This command will track down information in non analyzed libraries but also includes records for all objects in the selected library not just for 20 Section Installation and Tutorial unused ones and can take an extremely long time to run as well as being very large When should I use the DOCOBJ DOCPGM etc commands When you start using Docu Mint you will analyze your libraries After a library has been analyzed you can use these commands to update the internal Docu Mint reference information for just a few objects at a time when they have changed rather than reanalyzing the entire library What can do with the DOCILESRC command You can use the DOCILESRC command to enhance your ILE source code typically source code that has recently been converted to ILE using IBM s CVTRPGSRC When you run DOCILESRC over an ILE source member the following changes are made a Field definitions are consolidated into D Specs a Comment lines are converted to high intensity a IFand DO structures are documented etc Can I use Docu Mint to search source member for
42. does not support multiple nesting levels for displaying the data as the output would likely be too unwieldy to work with and hierarchies unclear However you can type WWU next to any item in the list above to drill down on a particular entry Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 75 Library The library in which the object resides This value is blank for all child objects Type Attr Use this field to change the child object type After changing this and pressing Enter the WWU list display will be rebuilt based on the new selection criteria The list portion of this column displays the object type such as DTAARA FILE PGM etc The attribute of the object such as CLP or RPG is appended to the type when possible Seq The source sequence number of the parent object at which the child is used Usage How the child object is used Normally object usage is described by the name of the command or procedure operating on a given object For an explanation of the special object usage descriptions defined by Docu Mint refer to object usage abbreviations in Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 Text A description of the object Child Displays the name of the child used in this particular reference Usually the child shown here is the same as the non indented child previously shown in the list A child name in this column that differs from the previous child name in the Object column indicates this Child is a logical file
43. entries and select those which equal or contain any of the values specified When you build a TEXT rule the panel presented is similar to this one 21302 BEE File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule Analysis 1 Analyze files in LG LIB Property TEXT Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 5 Type information press Enter Relationship xCT xEQ CT Start Colum 1 Search criteria Date Dt dt Dat dat E F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cance l 16754 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO06S4 16 54 e 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Al H Figure 11 10 Relationship Two relationships can be defined in TEXT rules EQ and CT If you select EQ Docu Mint evaluates the field text beginning with the column specified for the number of spaces of each portion of text that you enter If you select CT Docu Mint checks for the text from the start column to the end of the line Start Column Type the column at which to begin selecting the field text entry or entries Note how this value is used in the Relationship notes immediately above Search Criteria On this line you can enter one or more portions of field text to be located These must be enclosed in single quotes with one space between multiple entries The search criteria is case sensitive If you specify EQ as the relat
44. for the object All other programs and source have been analyzed so cleaning up these inconsistencies is optional In cases like this you can either address the problem by finding the missing source members and move them back to where they should be or recompile your programs from the new location Or if the source and objects are where you want them already and there isn t a problem you can define an alternate source reference to point to the current source location 28 Section Installation and Tutorial At the Display Library Analysis Errors panel above you need to scan through the list and determine if there are any patterns to the errors If necessary press F11 to view the actual error messages associated with the IDs on the right Do the errors represent the programs in a particular application Do they belong to very old programs Or perhaps it s only programs that have been converted to ILE Keep in mind that some errors might just be one time anomalies where someone has compiled out of the wrong library or mistakenly deleted source etc In the example above there s no particular mystery to what happened we just moved a few source members to a different source file thus generating the CPF4102s Docu Mint includes a useful tool for handling this type of problem alternate source file references These are rules that tell the analysis process that if it searches for a source member in a particular file and libra
45. from the panel first presented when you run the strpoc command If the BCD Support Library BCDSUPPT is already on your system because you are using other BCD software it will be omitted from the install Otherwise that library is also installed automatically This concludes the installation instructions You are now ready to start working with Docu Mint Note that you need to mark and analyze your libraries before you can use any of the reports or commands The following sections of this guide include detailed instructions on how to quickly get started with these steps 16 Section Installation and Tutorial Getting Started with Docu Mint Overview of How Docu Mint Works Most of the Docu Mint commands are designed to run over Docu Mint s internally built files of information about the objects and source you have analyzed This means that when you run the reports or specific commands the data is readily available and doesn t have to be retrieved each time However in order to get started with Docu Mint you must first mark and analyze the libraries that you will be working with After analyzing a library or set of libraries you should then check the analysis errors listing to show you whether any errors occurred during the analysis process An example of a typical analysis error you would encounter is where the source for one of your programs has been moved or deleted so the analysis process cant find it where it expects to
46. is presented ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ojx Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Change Data Area System EXCEL170 TYPO vaca we ae CHAR Length 1024 Taat eoa ae et LDA for Job 018609 KEVINH QPADEVO01D Job switches 00000000 Value Offset Mis cre OTT TI nt AE ee r LA T 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 More Press Enter to Cont inue F3 Exit F12 Cancel K gt 11 14 11 14 4B IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 8 7 Using the Edit Local Data Area Display The display is similar to the DSPDTAARA display The two main differences are the addition of a field showing the current job s job switches and the ability to edit the displayed contents of the job s local data area To change the job switches type a 0 or 1 over the existing switch values To edit the local data area type over the existing characters Use the Roll Up Down keys to change the offset into the LDA Non displayable characters will show up in the LDA display as solid blocks As long as you do not change these characters or their position by inserting or deleting characters in the LDA their true values will not be altered When you are finished making your changes press Enter to accept these changes To cancel any changes that you have made press F3 Exit or F12 Cancel 128 Section Ill Menu Reference Opt
47. is to mark the libraries that you want to analyze with an option of LOAD To mark a library use option 8 from the panel above You can mark as many libraries as you want before starting an analysis A useful technique is to group libraries together which allows you to submit several libraries to be analyzed at once i e a group To add libraries to a group select option 14 next to each to run the cHGLIBATR command Or you can also press F6 from the WWL screen to present a screen to create and work with library groups After marking your libraries use option 6 to run the sTRLIBANZ command for each library or a library group to begin the analysis process After your library analyses have completed select option 10 from the WWL panel illustrated above next to each of your analyzed libraries to check whether the process encountered any errors As has been mentioned previously the most common errors are those resulting from source code not being found for an object To address this type of error you can create alternate source references that the analysis process will use to know where to look for object source You can use option 6 from the Display Library Analysis Errors screen to easily add these rules illustrated below 18 Section Installation and Tutorial You can also print your error report by pressing F21 Here is an illustration of the Display Library Analysis Errors panel where we have also selected option 6 t
48. one above will display additional details about the rule that selected or omitted the entry However if you were doing an analysis of dozens or hundreds of files then individually deselecting the unwanted fields would be an inefficient way to tackle this More likely you would want to review your results and look for patterns and then create Omit rules that remove a wider set of records For example one Omit rule that we could define would be to exclude alpha fields To create this rule press F3 once or twice from where you are to return to the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel and then select option 7 next to the FILE analysis we have created to work with your rules 38 Section Installation and Tutorial At the panel presented press F8 to work with your omit rules Note the one already there of type QNAME Qualified Field Name Press F6 to create another entry The prompt below is presented Select Field Property Property 1 Select Opt Property Description _ ATR Field attributes COLHDG Field column headings EDTCDE Field edit code EDTWRD Field edit word NAME Field name QNAME Qualified Lib file amp field name TEXT Field text _ TYPE Field type Fie Cancel Select the last option TYPE At the panel presented enter a field type of A for Alpha After defining your new rule press Enter until you return to the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel Once more select an option 1 next to your
49. or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the special value NONE is not recommended 226 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Program Field Cross Reference Report The Program Field Cross Reference report is created with the following spool file attributes Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT and User data USRDTA PgmFldXref PRTANZERR Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIB Library Library name ALL The Print Analysis Errors command produces a report of objects Docu Mint was unable to analyze properly Information included on the report includes the object name library type attribute and source data along with an error message id and a brief description of the error This report will help you take the proper measures to obtain a clean analysis of the objects on your system You can work with your analysis errors in the following ways a Use option 10 from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel to present an interactive display listing the errors from which you can create alternate source file rules a Selecting option 3 from Docu Mint menu DM4LIB Menu DM LIB can be reached by selecting option 1 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command PRTANZERR from a command line Command Parameters LIB Specify the library whose analyzed objects will be included on the report This pa
50. page through the entries Use option 1 to select the library or libraries you want to include in the group When you press Enter after selecting all the libraries you need these are displayed in the main body of the panel Use option 4 to remove a library from the group When you work with library groups and group entries remember that the command CHGLIBATR may also be used to add entries to a group Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 59 60 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Working with Analyzed Objects After you have analyzed a library and reviewed the analysis report to make sure your results are as complete as possible you can select option 1 from the Work with System Libraries panel to present a list of the objects in that library When you do this the Work with Analyzed Objects panel is presented shown below ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal jo x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Hork Hith Analyzed Objects VBROHO Library DH DEHOL IB Position to Position to type Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete SeDisplay T Renane B HRKHHRUSE 9 HRKUSEOBJ 10 Analyze object 11 CHPGHINF 12 Hork uith obj 14 Create Object Library Type Attr Sre File Tent Size Ouner _ CONPHST DH 0EHOLIB F ILE PF Conpany naster file 40960 Bytes QPGHR _ CUSTHST DH DEHOLIB F ILE PF Custoner naster file 81920 Bytes OPGHIR _ OMK DH DE
51. records where the field usage is Input only 5 Display Select option 5 to display additional information about an entry in the list This concludes the section on creating and working with FILE Analyses Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 177 Creating a PGM Analysis Below is the panel presented for creating and changing an extended field analysis entry of type PGM 221302 L 51 x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith FILE Analysis Cross Reference PGM Analysis Information Analysis process number 2 Analysis description Analyze programs in LG LIB Analysis type PGM Program name 2 ee ee ALL Program name GENERIC ALL Library 1 we ee ee es LG LIB Library name Associated FILE Analysis References Type options press Enter 1 Attach to PGM analysis 4 Detach 5 Display Opt Proc Description Analyzed Files gt 1 Analyze files in LG LIB LG LIB ALL F3 Exit FS Refresh F8 Show all FILE entries Bottom Fi2 Cancel FILE records marked with gt attached to program analysis 16 04 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 16 4 KO 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Figure 11 15 This panel includes the analysis type in this case PGM and description and the name of the program or set of programs the analysis is over Analysis Description This is a summary description of the analysis entry Analysi
52. reload This panel also supports the value ALL For more information on named library lists see Using the Work with Library Lists WRKLIBL Command INDPTN The Indent Pattern is used to specify the characters preceding an indented entry This parameter is used in conjunction with the Columns to indent parameter COLUMNS Use this parameter to specify how many columns to indent each child s parent This parameter is used in conjunction with the Indent pattern parameter This parameter accepts a value of 1 2 or 3 OUTPUT Specifies where the output from the command is sent Possible values are Display or PRINT Report For a complete description of the panels presented by the Work Where Used command and the options available from these please refer to Option 3 Work with Where Used on page 101 Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 249 250 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Index Symbols ATR Selection Field Type Attributes 165 COLHDG Selection Column Heading 166 CONSTANT Selection Constant Name PGM analysis rule 182 EDTCDE Selection Edit Code 167 EDTWRD Selection Edit Word 168 FILE Analysis overview 155 FILE Analysis References in PGM analyses 178 FILE Analysis Results reports 191 working with 173 FILE and PGM Analyses relationship 179 FILE Field Analysis Entries creating and changing 160 LOAD marking libs to be analyzed 87 NAME Selection Field Name 169 PGM Analysis associat
53. source library For example you may want to confirm that all of your program objects in your production object library have been compiled from Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 213 source files in PRODSRC To do this enter the production source library Any exceptions will be noted on the report NONE will omit this comparison Flag observable programs This parameter will flag any observable programs as being in error Often when programs are packaged for distribution observability is removed Entering YES for this parameter will generate an exception if any programs have observability NO will omit this comparison Flag CL programs with logging This parameter will note any CL programs that are set to enable logging of the CL commands executed by the program Often when CL programs are packaged for distribution it is desirable to have CL logging set to NO Entering YES for this parameter will generate an exception if any CL logging is enabled NO will omit this comparison Flag PGMS with RTVCLSRC This parameter will note any CL programs for which source can be retrieved using the RTVCLSRC command Often when CL programs are packaged for distribution it is important that the source code cannot be retrieved Entering YES for this parameter will generate an exception if any CL program source can be retrieved NO will omit this comparison Compare object to source date This parameter will flag in error any programs wh
54. specifying both how to perform the search such as whether or not to ignore case and the ability to specify a wild card character as well as what source to search generic support is provided for source file name source library name source member name and source type A unique feature of the command allows the user to request that strings found within comments will not appear on the report Scan Source may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 1 from Docu Mint menu DM UTL Menu DM UTL can be reached by selecting option 4 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command SCN from a command line Command Parameters Certain parameters allow a generic type entry which can be in one of the following formats Format Description ABC Limit the selection to values beginning with the characters ABC For example ABC ABCD or ABCTEST ABC Limit the selection to values ending with the characters ABC For example ABC DABC or TESTABC B Limit the selection to values that have the char B anywhere in the name For example B BALL or ABCD Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 235 STRING Enter the character string to be searched for in the requested source Up to 10 strings may be entered each string containing up to 25 characters Find strings containing lowercase letters or embedded blanks must be enclosed in single quotes IGNCASE Specify whether or not lowercase characters should be treated as upperc
55. step is to select and analyze the libraries that you want to work with and then fine tune the results of your analysis to ensure that achieve the most complete results possible Once you are satisfied with the quality of each library analysis you can start working with the results To begin working with Docu Mint add DM LIB to your library list and execute the STRDOC command The first screen presented is the Work with System Libraries panel This panel described in detail in this chapter lists the libraries on your system and some details on when each was last analyzed From the Work with System Libraries WWL panel you can press F2 to present the Docu Mint Main Menu or select from the many other options available for working with your libraries There are also function keys to take you to all the other main Docu Mint menus From the WWL screen you can use option 8 Mark lib LOAD to easily mark your libraries to be loaded into the internal Docu Mint database Once you have marked all the libraries you want to analyze you can then initiate the library analysis with option 6 Start lib anz After the analyses are complete you can use option 10 View print err to display and work with the analysis errors you encounter in each library If there are any patterns to your analysis errors you can create alternate source file references to address these and then quickly reanalyze the library to update your results After you have confirmed that
56. the fields in that file followed by their attributes and buffer positions The Field Usage columns include program name lib references along with the actual usage of the field in that program The usage values are as follows Usage Values Description Inp Used in a file s input specification Out Used in a files output specification ModD Modified Directly Used in result field of calculation specification Ref Referenced Used as factor 2 of LIKE DEFN Use Used in factor 1 or factor 2 or as index to array in result field You can also press F20 to move the page to the right and display any additional Field Usage entries Press F19 to return to the leftmost page 114 Section Ill Menu Reference Option 2 Database File Field Cross Reference Report The Database File Field Cross Reference report lists field definitions within externally described files The report will list for all field names requested a cross reference list of the fields and all files containing each field When running this report you can specify up to 10 files or sets of files The fields in these files will then be cross referenced against the fields specified in the Field name parameter You can enter up to 10 field names to check for When you selection the option to run this report the panel below is first presented ifm 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help
57. to make search ID Selected fields DS0005 JBDT 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N DS0005 TIME 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL LVO1 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL LVO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL UMDY 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N Number of Selected fields 5 Program LG B11 Count Details in Range Selected fields DS0004 JBDT 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N DS0004 TIME 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL EPO1 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL EPO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL LVO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL UMDY 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N LG DETL2 LDLODT 6 0 P Log Date ATR EQ 6 0 N Number of Selected fields 7 10 29 97 16 01 11 PGM Analysis File Field Listing by Program Selected Fields Only Page 1 From program A To program Z Analysis 2 PGM Analyze programs in LG LIB Date analyzed 2007 10 21 Objects LG LIB ALL File Field Attributes Field text Rule Applied to This Record Program LG L02 Select Dates for Log Report Selected fields INTERNAL WKO04 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL WKOO06 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N INTERNAL WKOO9 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports 199 INTERNAL UMDY 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N LITERAL 000000 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 N LG HSTL3 LHDADT 6 0 P Date Performed ATR EQ 6 0 N LG LO2FM WKOO5 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N LG LO2FM WKOO8 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N PSDS JBDT 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N PSDS TIME 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 N Number of
58. together use the CHGLIBATR command or press F6 A from the WWL screen to present the Work with Library Groups panel Chapter 5 Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis 87 The defaults for the remaining options will normally work fine for you The only one you may want to give consideration to is the last one to include extended field cross reference information The extended field cross reference options require that very detailed i e space consuming information be extracted from your files so if you aren t going to be using those functions you may want to set this option to NO You can clear these internal files at any time using the CLRPGMXREF command For a complete description of each of the command parameters please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference 88 Section Ill Menu Reference Option 3 Library Analysis Error Report Use option 3 to print an error analysis report for a selected library or all libraries The error analysis report includes a list of objects Docu Mint was unable to analyze properly and some summary information as to why the analysis failed The report includes information such as the object name library type attribute and source data along with an error message ID and a brief description of the error This report will help you take the proper measures to obtain a clean analysis of the objects on your system When you select the option to run the PRTANZERR command Docu Mint
59. use the information presented on this panel to fine tune your field select omit criteria as well as to determine specifically which of your rules resulted in the selection or omission of a field This option and the panels presented are described in detail later in this chapter Creating and Editing a FILE Field Analysis Entry To begin creating an extended field analysis definition press F6 from Figure 11 1 After you ve created an entry you can make changes to it using option 2 When you press F6 to create a new analysis Docu Mint first prompts you for the analysis type PGM or FILE Once you select the type of FILE the panel below is presented for working with the extended field analysis ifm 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E 0 xi Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork With Object Analysis Type information press Enter Analysis process number 5 Analysis description Extract all Date Fields Analysis type FILE FILE PGM Object name 2 ALL Object name GENERIC ALL LIOR dese a Te nets ae Be Ge tse oe LG LIB Library name F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel LE gt 9 47 9 47 AO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 11 2 160 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Explanation of Panel Analysis Description Type a summary description of the analysis Analysis Type Analyses are of two types
60. ve 4 xEDTHRD CT EA F3 Exit F4 Lookup F5 Refresh F6 Create Bottom F8 View omit rules F12 Cance F21 Print 05 24 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPC06S4 5 24 2 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Ki H Figure 11 3 Explanation of Panel This panel displays a list of rules defined for the selected FILE analysis entry From here you can create new rules by pressing F6 or modify existing ones using option 2 Note that when you build multiple rules these are applied with the equivalent to an OR condition That means that in the example above all fields that are 6 0 N will be selected according to rule 1 regardless of whether field column heading contains CT the text date according to rule 2 From this panel you can press F21 to print a list of your Select and Omit rules Press F8 to toggle between working with Omit vs Select rules When you first present this panel the Select rules are displayed Defining Select Omit Rules As mentioned above when selecting records only one of the select rules needs to be satisfied to include a field After reviewing the results of your field 162 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions selections you may find several fields that should not be included in the results even though they match one or more of the select rules defined For example if you are searching for 6 digit date fields using a rule of ATR EQ 6 0 N you may inadvertently select t
61. will be retrieved a Job description name Type the name of the job description to be used If you leave the job description library blank LIBL is assumed for the library name Options to Work With Library Lists Below are the options available for working with your existing library lists 2 Edit Select option 2 to change remove or resequence libraries in a library list 3 Copy Type an option 3 next to each library list you want to copy and press Enter When you do this Docu Mint presents a new screen showing the selected Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration 135 list s and allows you to specify a new name for them You may have to roll through the list to see all the library lists you chose Type the name you want to copy the library lists to under the New Name column If there are lists that you decide you no longer wish to copy just leave their new names unchanged 4 Delete Use option 4 to delete library list entries Docu Mint presents a confirmation list of the selected libraries before deleting them You can press F12 Cancel from that screen to return to the selection screen 5 Display You can display your library list entry information using option 5 7 Rename To rename a library list type an option 7 next to each library list you want to rename and press Enter At the panel presented type the new library list name s or press F12 to cancel the change s Creating and Changing Library List Entrie
62. you have finished the library analysis process you can then run any of the other functions in Docu Mint to work with the results Docu Mint is very easy to use Your greatest challenge will be to familiarize yourself with the output of the different reports and the options available for customizing your results Remember to use the online Help whenever you have any doubts about how something works About this Manual This manual is a User Guide for Docu Mint V6R5M0 and higher It includes instructions for installing and getting started with Docu Mint as well as detailed descriptions of each command and menu option This manual is divided into the following sections Section I Installation and Tutorial The first section which you are now reading of the User s Guide includes a brief overview of Docu Mint and instructions on how to install it and quickly get started working with it In addition this section also includes descriptions of common tasks you will perform with Docu Mint and how to quickly accomplish them Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects In Part II we describe in detail the two main screens you will use most when working with Docu Mint the Work with System Libraries WWL and Work with Analyzed Objects WWO From these screens you can access most of the other options and functions you will need when working with Docu Mint ona daily basis Section IIl Menu Reference The third part of this manual include
63. your results are as complete as possible you can select option 1 next to your library to present the Work with Analyzed Objects WWO screen described in the next chapter From this panel you can execute a wide variety of options for working with your analysis results including the commonly used WWU and WUO commands And if there s an option that you need there but doesn t currently exist you can easily create it Between the WWL and WWO screens you should have access through the options and function keys to most of the important features and reports available in Docu Mint The remainder of this chapter describes in detail how to use the Work with System Libraries panel and all the options available from that screen Please take the time to review each section and become familiar with the interface as it will be the key to your effective use of the software Work with System Libraries The Work with System Libraries WWL screen is the initial panel presented when you run the STRDOC command If you have used previous versions of the software you can get to the older menu system by pressing F2 from this panel or make your default initial screen by using the CFGSTRDOC command Below is an illustration of the WWL panel ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal TTS File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Hork Hith Systen Libraries VEROHO Position W0 s soroas o Analyze
64. 1 Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search We are telling Property gt TEXT Docu Mint to Condition SEL SELECT j Sequence 3 include all fields h h fi ld Type information press Enter where t S 1e Relationship BCT EQ CT text contains Start Column _7 any of the Search criteria Price price Transaction Cost Total Amount character strings entered Multiple F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fii Delete Fi2 Cancel character All changes processed Press enter to continue strings have to B gt 12 25 be enclosed in 12 25 fae IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 single quotes with one space between them 36 Section Installation and Tutorial Press Enter twice to return to the Work with SELECT Rule Detail panel After we build our select rules and run the analysis the first time we ll come back and define an OMIT rule to exclude some general types of fields that we don t want to see Press Enter once more to return to the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel Your analysis should now be shown in the list as below Select option 1 next to your analysis to run it When you press Enter a window appears prompting you for a batch job description Just press Enter and Docu Mint will submit the analysis and then return to the panel at right 18m 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal 7 iol x File Edit Connectio
65. 2 The Quick Start Exercise 41 Press Enter to submit the report then enter twice more to return to the Work with System Libraries panel At the command line run the command WRKSBMJOB and check that your job is running the job is FLDTOFLD When it finishes select an option 8 next to it and then an option 5 The first page of the report will be similar to the one shown here Roll thr ough lo1 x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help the report to get Display Spooled File File oaa OSYSPRT Page Line 1 3 Control Columns 1 130 a sense of the aal a 2 O E ME TE EEEE TE E E E E O EESO OES E E RAR OE PE information 2001 10 29 16 45 28 Progran Change Requirenents Hork Sheet Page A Fron progran OMS0EH0L1B 4LL To progran OM OEHOL1B ALL provided Process 2 PGM Find all price amp anount Fields Analysis date 2001 10 29 16 41 11 Progran ODOROD Warehouse naster file Source Chapter 11 Oe OORE S R aaa Direct field references Extended Field DERM ORDERD 7 2 P Entended Mrount Is used in the fol lowing display pr inter fornats ORDERD OHSDEHOL TB RORDERD Analysis UNITP ORDERD 5 2 P Unit Price m Is used in the follouing display pr inter fornats Functions ORDERD OHSDEHOLIB RORDERD A Progran OOOROH Warehouse naster file wre N U provides Moni MRA iil ak Direct Field references additional HOTOT ORDERA 9 2 P Order Total H information on F3 Enit Fi Cancel Flg Left Fe0 Right F24stlore
66. 2HH LG TSKL9 1822 00 c Z ADDEPO2 TMSTDT _ HIVAL LG TSKL9 2726 00 H MOVEL HIVAL TMSTDT Set hi Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F22 Fold Unfold 12 03 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO06S4 123 Ao 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Kil H Figure 11 22 Explanation of Panel In this example we have selected the field TMSTDT used in the program LG 046 This field is affected or modified by the fields shown in the list portion of the panel In this example we have pressed F22 Fold Unfold to show the actual lines of code where the fields are affected 8 Fields that affect this field From this panel you can also take option 8 to drill down and see the fields that affect those that affect the original field selected 9 Fields affected by this field You can also use option 9 to drill up and check the fields affected by those affected by the original field selected F22 Fold Unfold Use F22 to display hide the actual line of source referencing the field in question 188 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Fields Affect By this Field list Option 9 from Figure 11 19 When you select option 9 next to a field in your SELECT list Docu Mint displays a list of the fields affected by the selected field The panel presented when option 9 is selected is similar to this one ICO busine a aA e a 64046 Program Library a LG4LIB CHO i ETT ERS LE TSKL9 The field shoun here is a RE ae
67. 94 00 CALL ObGen c 1992 99 Excelsystens Rel 2 20R GN HLP Dhe Dhal IB 4PGH RPGLE 1643 00 CALL Docu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GN HLP __ Dha Dhal 1B POH RPG 1959 00 CALL Docu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GN HLP Dho Dhal IB POH RPG 2778 00 CALL Docu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GN HLP __ Dhi Dhal IB PGH RPG 1171 00 CALL Docu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GN HLP __ DMg103 OHWLIB PGH APG 1208 00 CALL Oocu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GNaHLP __ DMg10 DhaLiBb PGH APG 2098 00 CALL Docu Hint VSROHO c BCD 1982 99 GNaHLP __ DNg105 DhaLiBb PGH APG 2510 00 CALL Docu Hint V5ROHO Ce BCD 1982 99 GNaHLP _ ONCPIQ DH DEHOLIB PGH RPG 1391 00 CALL Docu Hint Deno Conpany Inquiry Pgh GHaHLP ONCPHT DHaDEHOLIB 4PGH APG 1228 00 CALL Docu Hint Deno Conpany Haintenance Pgh CH HLP PEN F4 Pronpt Fo Re fresh F9 Re tr ieve Fi0 Connand entry Fi2 Cancel F23 Hore options eos iH 8 2 32 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 7 Figure 4 7 Object You can use the object field to change the child object name After changing this value and pressing Enter the WWU list display will be rebuilt based on the new selection criteria The list portion of this column displays the name of the object using the selected child object If the object name is not indented it is the child object selected Conversely an indented object name indicates a parent object that uses the given child This command
68. AYO Database File Layouts The Database File Layouts command produces a report listing file and field information including File Attribute Information Field Attribute Information Type physical or logical Field names Description Attributes character numeric binary packed etc Record format File buffer positions Access path Usage input output both neither Select omit logical files only Description Chapter 10 Menu DM ANZ Object Documentation 147 File Attribute Information Field Attribute Information Based on files logical files only Reference fields Dependent files physical files only DSPFLAYO Display File Layouts The Display File Layouts command produces a report showing display file samples along with field constant and keyword information about the display file PRTFLAYO Printer File Layouts The Printer File Layouts command produces a report showing printer file samples along with field constant and keyword information about the printer file Option 21 Menu DM MENU Menu Documentation Option 21 from DM ANZ presents the Menu Documentation Menu below ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal 3 l0 xj File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM MENU Business Computer Design V6ROMO Docu Mint Menu Documentation Menu 1 Document Menus DOCMENU 2 Menu Options Report PRTMNUEXP 3 Menu Explosion Report PRTMNUEXP 90 Sign Off Selec
69. BM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet jum 5 Figure 5 4 The most common error here is that the source for an object wasn t found If you look at the source library it s looking for you can see that its DB UPDSRC so it appears that the objects in error were initially compiled into a test library then moved directly to DB LIB rather than recompiled into DB LIB This problem could be remedied by creating one or two alternate source entries option 11 from the Docu Mint Configuration Menu to redirect Docu Mint when it tries to find source for the objects in this library Chapter 5 Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis 89 As for the remaining error Unable to open the COPY member we would have to go to the member DB ESD in DB SRC and see where it was trying to find the COPY member and why it couldn t open it probably because it no longer exists or has been moved Remember that even though some objects may not have been analyzed the remainder of the library has Any subsequent commands you run to work with your results will be complete with the exception of the objects that failed Working with Analysis Errors Interactively As of version 6 00 Docu Mint has also included an option from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel for working with your analysis errors in an interactive display The WWL screen is the default initial panel when you run the STRDOC command and from there you can select option 10 View
70. BRARY SELECTION AND ANALYSIS cccceeccccccccccsescceeceeeees 85 Option 1 Mark Library for Analysis 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 86 Option 2 Start Library Analysis 0 cece cee eens 87 Option 3 Library Analysis Error Report 0 cece eee cent er 89 Option 4 Clear Extended Program Field Analysis Records 4 91 Option 11 Refresh Library Control File 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 92 Option 12 Refresh Library Object Count 0 c cece eee eee eee 92 Chapter 6 MENU DM OBJ OBJECT CROSS REFERENCE 0ccccccccccccccccccsencscseeeccceseee 93 Option 2 Work with Used Objects 0 ccc cece eee ees 94 Using the Work with Used Objects Display 0 e eee eee 95 Using the Subset Work with Used Objects Display 0005 98 Using the Change Session Defaults Display 00 0 cee eee 99 Option 3 Work with Where Used 0 0 cece eee nee een ene ees 101 Using the Work with Where Used Display 000s cece eee ee 102 Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display 0005 104 Using the Change Session Defaults Display 0 0 00 cece eee ee 105 Option 4 Orphaned Objects Report 0 c cece eee eee ee eee eee 107 4 Table of Contents Option 5 Print Unused Objects Report 0c ccc eee eee eee eee 109 Chapter 7 MENU DM FLD FIELD CROSS REFERENCE
71. CM programs in CMLIB _Analysis_ date 2007 10 31 _ 14 07 22 Program CM UL1 SEU Transactions by User Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM UL1 Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 17 Approximate number of lines of DDS code to change 3 Files used F UPDAT LIBL SEU Transactions by User CD ULGL2 ASYS SEU Transactions by User CM UL2FM CMLIB Source Changes Inquiry By User ID Display File Program CM UL2 Source Changes Inquiry By User ID Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM UL2 Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 2 No DDS code changes required Files used F UPDAT LIBL Source Changes Inquiry By User ID CD ULGL1 ASYS Source Changes Inquiry By User ID CM UL3FM CMLIB Source Member Change History Display File Program CM VDT Shell Source Modification Tracking Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM VDT Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 2 Approximate number of lines of DDS code to change 1 Files used CD MSGF CMLIB Message file management file F UPDAT LIBL Message file management file CD MSPF CMLIB Message file parameter management file CM WMDFM CMLIB Work With Message Data Fields Display File Program CM WMD Work With Message Data Fields Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM WMD No RPG code changes required No DDS code changes required Files used CD LUMF CMLIB Last used message file by User iD CD MSPF CMLIB Message file parameter management file F UPDAT LIBL Message file parameter management file CD MSGF CMLIB Message file mana
72. COPY LLL GN TPAL1 GNaLIB FILE LF 19 00 INP Proen Plus c 1988 99 ExceISystens rel 5 02R OCLF Botton F3 Exit F4 Pronpt FS Refresh F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel Fig Actual library nanes F23 ore options F2g hore keys K 8 2 82 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 4 3 Object This field can be used to change the parent object name After changing this value and pressing Enter the WUO list display is rebuilt based on the new selection criteria The list portion of this column displays the object name If the object name is not indented the object displayed represents a parent object and appears in the list because it matches the Object Library and Type Attr criteria you requested All parent objects are further identified by a Usage value of Parent Conversely an indented object name indicates a child object that is used by the executable object higher in the list Since only 6 spaces are allocated to indent an object name all levels beyond this limit will display a number to the left of the object name indicating the indent level the object resides at Library Use this field to change the parent object library name The list portion displays the object library The library name value displayed is dependent upon the value of the Display library name parameter Press F14 Actual Resolved library names to toggle between showing the actual library 68 Section Il Working With Libra
73. DM PREP None Never 8 last analyzed In pDMusre None Never 34 i __ DM UPDLIB None Never 13 the illustration __ DM UPDSRC None Never g 1 22 gt More at right we have F2 Main menu F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh typed F6 WW lib groups F7 RSHLIBCTL F23 More opts F24 More keys DM DEMOLIB at 4 10 9 the top of the 103 f IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 panel and pressed Enter to position the list to that library From the WWL panel you can select options to analyze your libraries and then work with the results There are also functions keys to take you to all the menus in Docu Mint though the only one you really need to remember is F2 to present the Docu Mint Main Menu Try that now if you like Then return to this panel by pressing F3 The first step required is to mark the libraries that we want to have Docu Mint analyze for us To do this select option 8 Mark lib LOAD next to the library DM DEMOLIB and press Enter When you mark a library it doesn t yield any output it just tells Docu Mint what to do with that library the next time you 26 Section Installation and Tutorial analyze it When you analyze a library marked LOAD Docu Mint loads all the library information into it s internal cross reference files At the panel presented when you select option 8 Mark Library for Analysis press Enter to confirm your choice When you return to the WWL list shown above the word LOAD should be sho
74. Dhal IB HHSELO OANZOLS DhaLIB LF P 5 0 255 257 WHFORS DANZOLS DtsLIB LF P5 0 258 280 PHPRCR DANZHF DHaLIB PF P5 0 1 3 PHPRCR DANZHLI Dt8LIB LF P5 0 1 3 PFPRCR DANZPF DHaLIB PF P5 0 t3 PFFLEN DANZPF DHaLIB PF P5 0 66 6 PFSELR DANZPF DHaLIB PF P50 B 5 PFFSRS DANZPF DHaLIB PF P50 76 78 PFSELO DANZPF DHaLIB PF P50 79 8 PFFORS DANZPF DHaLIB PF P50 82 84 PFPRCR DANZPLI DHaLIB LF P5 0 1 3 PFFLEN DANZPLI DHaLIB LF P5 0 66 6 PESELA DANZPLI DHaLIB LF P50 B 5 PFFSRS DANZPLI DHaLIB LF P50 78 78 PFSELO DANZPLI DHaLIB LF P50 B o8 Hore F3 Exit Fl2 Cancel Fi9 Left F20 Right F24 tiore keys H 422 4 22 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nm 4 Figure 7 7 This shows the listings for the reference field DM PA from the reference file DOCUDICTNY The report shows each file that references the field as well as the actual field name in that file 118 Section III Menu Reference Option 4 Work with Program Field Usage Select the Work with Program Field Usage option to present a list interface to field usage within RPG programs From this list you can perform operations on the programs such as change copy delete display and rename Here is an example of the results of running this command and positioning the list to the field PDPGM ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Program Field Usage Exc
75. Display generic usage PRY PRY ALL DLT EXC i Display child object type PRV PRV ALL type select an option Display child object type ALL PRV PRV YES NO 9 WRKUSEOB Display child object type VAR PRV PRV YES NO Library list 2 PRY PRV JOB name Treat blank library name as PRY PRY name LIBL CURLIB J next to it The Treat variable library name as PRY PRY name LIBL CURLIB Display library name PRY PRY ACTUAL RESOLVE panel presented Maximum explosion level i 3 NOMAX 0 99 h Indent pattern PRV PRV pattern is shown at Columns to indent 2 PRV PRV 1 2 3 Output 2 a ee ee ee PRINT right Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt FS Refresh Fi2 Cancel Fi3 How to use this display Change the F24 More keys Maximum explosion level to 3 and leave 270 Sereen Shots Session af Reflection 1M 5250 Terminai Te E Fie Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help Work with Used Objects WRKUSEOBJ E E 3 6 38 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet all the other parms as is Then press Enter Docu Mint will display the message Building the used objects list and in a few seconds will display the next panel shown below This is the E output from Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Mint Business Computer Design WUODS3 01 running the Hork with Use
76. E Module Aternate Opt Seq Object Lib Object Lib 1 00 GN LIB GN SRC Bottom F3 Exit Fo Refresh Fi Top Fi8 Bottom iB gt 9 4 94 ho IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NuM Figure 9 8 To add new records type fields values into a new line in the list To add new empty lines to the bottom of the list press F18 Bottom Search Seq If you have multiple alternate entries for a library you can use the sequence to number to determine the order in which alternate libraries are searched Generally you would add the most likely candidates with lower sequence numbers ILE Module Object Lib This is the expected module library as determined by checking the program 140 Section Ill Menu Reference Alternate Object Lib Type the name of the actual library where the module resides Option 13 Maintain the Options Control File 00008 All Docu Mint list displays support the use of option codes to perform various functions on the items in the list Both PDM and Docu Mint defined option codes are recognized with the Docu Mint option codes Use option 13 to work with the options control file You can also work with your options by pressing F8 from the Work with System Libraries and Work with Analyzed Objects panel The panel presented is described in the section Customizing the WWL and WWO Options on page 80 of Chapter 4 The special options in Docu Mint for control
77. F 0 29 97 16 rom Analysis Objects le name LG CAL CALD CAL DETF DETL6 HSTL2 OBCL OBJL LG OBJL2 LG OBJL3 OBJL4 TSKL1 LG TSKL2 LG TSKL3 TSKL6 LG TSKL8 LG TSKL9 TXTF LG TXTL1 LG XRFEF XRFL1 LG XREL4 Total files 44 00 49 FILE Analysis File Summary Selected and Omitted Fields A To Z 1 FILE Analyze files in LG LIB Date analyzed 2007 10 19 11 35 50 LG LIB ALL Text Clients Contacts called for evaluations Tech Support Evaluation Call Details Responses Tech Support Evaluation Comments G B amp N Tech Support Reps Who Talked to a Contact Polled Called Clients by Contact Name Tech Support Evaluation Call Details Responses Calls Stats File Log Details file Log Details File by Date and Log Detail by date and Seq descending Logical view by Log number Log Report history file History by Date and Time History by User Date and Time History by Report Date and Time Object Change Log Object Changes by Obj Chg Object changes by Task Obj Chg Object master file Object Master by Object name and type Object Master by Type and Name Object Master by Size and Name Object Master by creation Date time Join of Customer Client Details Task Master File Task Master by Task Task Master by Task Description Task Master Bugs by Description Tasks by Commencement Date Task by product description Open tasks by Product descending date logge
78. FILE analysis to run it When you do this the previous results are cleared and the list is rebuilt according to the new criteria When it finishes running again select an option 9 next to it to work with the results The results 16m 270 Screen Shots Session tsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Mi E File Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help should now be Work With SELECTED Field Entries i Analysis 2 i FILE Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search similar to the Process selection DMHDEMOLIB ALL FEID pos ee a ee Se i Field mame list shown at File attributes ALL ALL PF LF right Type options press Enter 4 Omit field S Display 6 Print results 7 Where used 8 Rule info Opt File name Field Lngth Dc Tp Text CUSTMST CACTBL 7 2P Account Balance Note that there Z CUSTMST CCURDU 7 2P Current Due _ CUSTMST CovR30 7 2P Over 30 Days are stilla couple _ CUSTMST COVR6O H 7 2P over 60 Days e _ CUSTMST COVR90 7 2P Over 90 Days of fields we CUSTMST RFCRLT 7 2P Credit limit gt _ CUSTMST RFLAIN 7 2P Last invoice amount don t need to _ INVENTRY IVLOUN 9 2P Last unit price _ ITEMMST IIUNTP 5 2 P Standard Unit Price see the _ ITEMTRN TATY 5 2P Transaction quantity y ITEMTRN TSEQ 5 Transaction Line Transaction _ ORDERD DEXTAM 7 2P Extended Amount F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 Omitted records More quantity and the Fi0 View by field Fi2 Cancel F2i Print results Transaction 5 5 aa Line
79. FILE Analysis Results After you have defined all the FILE select rules that you need press Enter on the Work With SELECT Rule Detail panel to return to the Work With Extended Field and Program Analysis panel see Figure 11 1 From this panel select option 1 to execute the analysis you have defined This will submit a batch job that analyzes the specified files The results will include all selected and omitted fields derived from the analysis When the job has completed you can then select option 9 from the Work With Extended Field and Program Analysis panel to work with the results of your analysis Only one of the select rules needs to be satisfied to include a field After reviewing the results of your field selections you may find several fields that should not be included in the results even though they match one or more of the select rules defined For example if you are searching for 6 digit date fields using a rule of ATR EQ 6 0 N you may inadvertently select time fields which also satisfy this rule If this happens the time fields can be removed from your selection using one or a combination of the techniques below 1 Create an omit rule which will omit field text or column headings that contain the constant time A generic rule such as this will require that the analysis be executed again clearing the previous results and building a new set of results based on the revised rules After a field is selected it is t
80. GDET Log Date atk FIELD ATTA DISCREPAN LGADETLI REDET Log Date LOWDETL2 AYDETL2 Log Date LOWDETL3 AYDETL3 Log Date LGsDETL4 AGDET Log Date LGaDETLS AGDET Log Date LG4DETL REDET Log Date LG4DETL RGDET Log Date LGADETLE REDET Log Date LOWDETL9 RaDETLI Log Date Hore F3 Exit Fl2 Cancel FI9 Left F20 Right F2g tiore keys K 3 22 3 22 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 7 5 The top of the report displays the criteria used to execute it and below that is the report listing In this case only one field was selected LDLODT In the list portion of the report the first columns display the field names attributes and buffer positions Next to that is the list of files in which the field appears and the format name The last column is the field description The report details begin with the physical files and logical views where this field is found and the following pages include the display files in LG LIB where it was found along with the format Notice that at right it has also flagged a discrepancy in the field attributes or LDLODT in the file LG DETF 116 Section III Menu Reference Option 3 Reference Field Cross Reference Report The Reference Field Cross Reference report produces a list sorted by reference field name showing the fields from other files on the system that are based on the reference field selected When you choose this menu option from DM FLD the panel belo
81. GM RPG LG R01 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 LG R15 LG LIB PGM RPG LG6 R15 QRPGSRC KEVINH CPF4102 LG R15C LG LIB PGM CLP LG R1SC QcLsRc KEVINH CPF4102 LG TMP LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG TMP QRPGLESRC LG SRC CPF4102 LG 0160LD LG LIB PGM RPG LG6 016 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 LG 082C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 082C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 LG 319 LG L IB PGM RPGLE L6 319 QRPGLESRC LGHUPDLIB CPF4102 L6 365 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG 365 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF4102 LG 365C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 365C QCLSRC LG UPDLIB CPF402 LG 366 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG 366 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF4102 _ L6 368 LG LIB PGM RPGLE LG6 368 QRPGLESRC LGHUPDLIB CPF4102 Fii Dsp err msg txt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Alt source lib More Fi2 Cancel F2i Prt anz err rpt iB gt 3 40 3 40 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 Figure 3 2 This panel initially displays a list of the errors encountered in analyzing a single library Type an N for the option Display Objects in Error Only to see a record of all analyzed objects in the library If you want to review the error message details press F11 to fold drop the list You can also press F21 to print this report While there are a variety of errors you can encounter in the process of analyzing a library the most commonly encountered errors usually stem from having moved an object s source at some point after it was last compiled Though Docu Mint can retrieve a fair amount of information from the actual object
82. HOL IB HODULE RPGL Lookup Iten 425964 Bytes QPGHR _ OMK ONADENOLIB SRCH RPGLE ORPGLESRC2 Lookup Iten 1615 Records _ ODTTLKFH DH 0EHOL IB F ILE DSPF Lookup Iten Display File 20480 Bytes QPGHR __ ODITLKFH DH DEHOLIB SRCH DSPF ODDSSRC Lookup Iten Display File 268 Records _ DDORDD DH DEHOL IB BNDDIR DM OEHOLIB OD0ROD Binding Directory 8192 Bytes OPGHR DDORDD DH DEHOL IB4PGH RPGLE Haintain Order Details 1462272 Bytes OPGHR _ DDORDO ONADENOLIB SRCH RPGLE ORPGLESRC Haintain Order Details 2556 Records _ DDORDOFH DH DENOL IBF ILE DSPF Haintain Order Details Display File 24576 Bytes OPGHR DDORDOFH DH OENOLIB SRCH DSPF OQDDSSRC Haintain Order Details Display File 384 Records DOORDH DH DENOL IB BNDDIR DH DEHOL 1B DDORDH Binding Directory 8192 Bytes OPGHR __ DOORDH DH DENOL 1B PGH RPGLE Haintain Order Headers 991232 Bytes OPGHR fore Festlain nenu Fo Exit F4 Pronpt F5 Refresh F Docobj nenu F8 0ptions conf ig Fo Retr ieve Fid Prev view Fit Nent view Fi2 Cancel Fid Field analysis Fe4sHore keys E 10 3 10 3 AD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 4 1 This panel includes an alphabetical list of all objects and source members included in the selected library To position the list to a specific entry type the object name in the prompt To position the list to the objects of a specific type enter the desired type in the second prompt at the top of the screen You can also press F10 and F11 to toggle between several
83. J Object Cross Reference F14 WrkSbmJob Press F14 to execute the WRKSBMJOB command F15 Field menu F15 presents the Field Cross Reference Menu DM FLD from which you can run the various field cross reference reports as well as work with your extended field analyses For a detailed description of the menu DM FLD please refer to Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 52 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects F16 Utility menu The Docu Mint Utility Menu DM UTL allows you to run a variety of commands for working with and formatting your source updating library information and scanning source code For a detailed description of the menu DM UTL please refer to Chapter 8 Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities F17 Config menu The Configuration Menu allows you to work with your library lists and library attributes and also work with your alternate source file references For a detailed description of the menu DM CFG please refer to Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration F18 Field analysis Press F18 to present the Work with Extended Field Analysis screen From here you can create explicit rules to locate specific fields or types of fields in your files and programs The extended field analysis functions are described in detail in Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions F19 Docobj menu Press F19 to present the Object Documentation Menu DM ANZ from which you can document specific objects that you
84. LD If you like you can try out the other commands before moving on to the next section When youre ready to continue press F3 a few times from menu DM FLD to return to the Work with System Libraries panel Then press F18 to work with the Extended Field Analysis functions This screen will initially show no entries The Extended Field Analysis functions in Docu Mint allow you to define specific field identification criteria to locate certain types of fields in your files and programs and identify their usage Once the fields have been found you can also access info on how they affect and are affected by other fields Please refer to Part IV of this guide for a comprehensive description of how to use the Extended Field Analysis functions and how to use FILE and PGM analyses together To illustrate this feature were going to work through a scenario where we ll be making some updates to an application for a client in Argentina Due to the catastrophic inflation there over the last few years we now need to find all the files and programs that have price or cost fields in them so we can increase the size of the fields to accommodate all the extra zeros 34 Section Installation and Tutorial To begin press F6 from the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel to create a new analysis A window will pop up prompting you for the analysis type Enter FILE as shown here Object Analysis Creation Analysis type WFILE PGM FI
85. LE Fie Cancel We will start by building a FILE analysis and then incorporate the results from it into a PGM analysis we ll create afterwards When you key 16m 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal loxi s x File Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help in the analysis Work Hith Object Analysis type and press Type information press Enter Analysis process number 1 Enter the panel Analysis description Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search j i Analysis type an srra rsa F ILE FILE PGM at right will Object name a g o i a ALL Object name GENERIC ALL appear LIBA a et ep ee een ee a Re DM DEMOLIB Library name Type a description for the analysis and enter the objects that it will be built F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel over ALL In B gt DM DEMOLIB 5 40 Ke IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Press Enter twice When you do so Docu Mint takes you directly to the panel for defining SELECT rules The next step is to define the rules for our analysis These will be the criteria that Docu Mint will use to search through our files Press F6 to create a new rule Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 35 When you press ESE S2xS Trem yer 7 E Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help F6 the prompt Work With SELECT Rule Detail Analysis Select Field Property window shown Objects analyzed vrapon a Soi g i Sequence n
86. LG B LG TSKL2 TMUPID 4 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL3 TMUPID 5 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL4 TMUPID 6 OMIT QNAME EQ LG B LG TSKL5 TMUPID 7 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL6 TMUPID 8 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL8 TMUPID 9 OMIT QNAME EQ LG B LG TSKL9 TMUPID 20 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB QCLSRC SRCDAT 21 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB QCMDSRC SRCDAT 22 OMIT QNAME EQ LG B QDDSSRC SRCDAT 23 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB QRPGSRC SRCDAT 204 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions DATE Contact Page SECTION Docu Mint Command Reference In this Section Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference Docu Mint Command Reference This section of the manual includes descriptions of the commands in Docu Mint and the valid parameters for each of the commands Use this section of the manual for detailed reference information on the command parameters Chapter 1 to Chapter 12 should be used as a general user s reference in day to day utilization of the software The commands in this section of the manual are listed in alphabetical order CHGDOCCTL Command The Change Docu Mint Control Data command presents a display which allows you to customize Docu Mint to display your company s name on Docu Mint s displays and reports as well as control whether the splash screen is first presented when you run the STRDOC command Change Docu Mint Control Data may be initiated in one of the f
87. LG DETF LDLODT 6 P Log Date _ LG DETL1 LDLCDT 6 P Log Close Date LG DETL1 LDLODT 6 P Log Date _ LG DETL2 LDLODT 6 P Log Date F3 Exit FS Refresh F8 Omitted records More Fi0 View by field Fi2 Cancel F21 Print results 04 29 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO06S4 4 23 K 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Ej Figure 11 12 Explanation of Panel This panel initially displays a list of all the fields in the selected file or group of files which qualified for any of the rules specified In the example above we were searching for date fields and have already omitted all fields selected that were not dates Pressing F8 displays a list of the fields that have been omitted from the analysis these included fields which had the word update in the field text or were 6 0 N for example Analysis This is the sequence number type and description of the file analysis currently displayed Process Selection The process selection is the library and files that were included in the analysis File Field Names Use these values to position the list You can also press F10 to toggle between views by field name or file field name Field Attributes You can select whether to display fields from physical files logical views or the default all files 174 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Explanation of Options 4 Omit Select Field Use option 4 to explicitly omit unwanted fields from the ana
88. LIBGRP parameter that have an ACTION attribute of LOAD This element accepts a value of NO or YES with a suggested default value of YES a The second element Remove controls whether or not to remove the cross reference data from the libraries specified in the LIBGRP parameter that have an ACTION attribute of REMOVE This Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 239 element accepts a value of NO or YES with a suggested default value of YES a The third element No action controls how libraries specified by the LIBGRP parameter that have an ACTION attribute of NONE are to be processed Enter a default value of NO to ignore processing of these libraries or a value of LOAD or REMOVE to Load or Remove cross reference data from these libraries RGZPFM press F10 The RGZPFM parm allows you to reorganize the internal Docu Mint files when running the STRLIBANZ command This option is useful when you have marked one or more libraries with REMOVE to remove their records from Docu Mint Specify YES to get the space savings from the purging of the records FLDXRF press F10 The FLDXREF parameter will load the program field cross reference file DPGMXP that is referenced by the Extended Field Analysis Module If this parameter is left as YES as significant number of records will be written to this file These records contain field usage and drill down information for each field found in a program This file can as a resu
89. LIBL DLT _ ODLTF 1 FILE FILE LIBL DLT _ DLTOVR 1 FILE Internal _ DSPDTA 1 DFUPGH PGH LIBL EXC _ DSPDTA 2 FILE FILE LIBL xEXC _ DSPOBJD 1 OBJ OBJT YPE LIBL OPR Hore F3 Exit F5 Refresh F1 Top F18 Bottom K gt 9 3 93 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 13 2 To add new commands to the list press F18 Bottom To change existing entries make the modifications directly to the list Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 241 WRKLIBL Command The Work with Library Lists command provides you with a list interface to named library lists Each named library list consists of a name description up to 15 system libraries current library and up to 25 user libraries From this display you can create edit copy delete display or rename named library lists Named library lists are used by Docu Mint in the Work with Used Objects WRKUSEOBJ or WUO command User written utilities may also make use of these named library lists by accessing the data from file DLIBLP Library List Master File in library DM LIB Work with Library Lists may be initiated in one of the following ways a Pressing F20 from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel a Selecting option 3 from Docu Mint menu DM CEFG Menu DM CFG can be reached by selecting option 4 from menu DM MAIN u Type WRKLIBL on any command line For a complete description of the panels presented when you run the WRKLIBL command and the fu
90. M 5250 Terminal 05 xj File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Library Analysis Errors Object Name 2 ee Object Library LG6 LIB ALL Name Object Type 2 2 Display Objects in Error Only Y Y Yes N No 6 Add alternate source reference Alternate Source Reference Opt Obje Compiled From Source Search Look In Source Errid OLR File Library Sequ File Library CPF4102 OL R QRPGSRC LG SRC 0 QRPGSRC LG L IB F4102 OL R F4102 OLeR SERSJANT CPF4102 _ OL R20C LG L IB PGM CLP LG R20C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ OL 022 LG L IB PGM RPG LG 022 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 6 OL 070 LG L IB PGM RPG LG 070 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL 083C LG LIB PGM CLP LG 083C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ OL 084C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 084C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL O85C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 085C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL O86C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 086C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ Ts 004 LG L IB PGM RPG TS 004 QRPGSRC KEVINH CPF4102 Fii Dsp err msg txt F3 Exit FS Refresh F12 Cancel Bottom Fei Prt anz err rpt mB gt 11 62 11 62 AO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 3 3 We have selected option 6 part way down our list of objects there is no particular reason why we selected the entry we did it s just appears to be similar to several others and Docu Mint has presented the Alternate Source Reference window When the window is first presented the first four fields are fill
91. Note that the PRTORPHOB is extremely thorough and as a result can take quite a long time to run if select one or more large libraries Below is a sample of the output of the PRTORPHOBJ command when run over the library DM DEMOLIB ism 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Spooled File File OSYSPRT Page Line 1 20 it Columns 1 130 DHORDOFH FILE OSPF 1998 01 15 OPGHR DHaDEHOLIB QDDSSRC DHORDOFH Docu Hint Deno Order Detail Entry Pgh Display Fi DHORDHFH FILE OSPF 1998 01 28 OPGHR DHaDEHOLIB QDDSSRC DHORDHFH Docu Hint Deio Order Header Haintenance Display DHRCPLFH FILE OSPF 1998 01 15 OPGHR DHaDEHOLIB QDDSSRC DHRCPLFH Docu Hint Deio Conpany Report Pronpt Display Fil DHRCSLFH FILE OSPF 1998 01 15 OPGHR DHaDEHOLIB QDDSSRC DHRCSLFH Docu Hint Deno Custoner Report Pronpt Display Fi DHRPHNFH FILE OSPF 1998 01 15 OPGHR DHaDEHOLIB QDDSSRC DHRPHNFH Docu Hint Deno Report Henu Display File COHPHST FILE PF 1998 01 15 OPGHR PROGENDEHO ODDSSRC COHPHST Company Haster file week Source not found siik Source Heber COMPHST found in source file CAH ODDSSRC iik Source Heber COMPHST found in source file DBgDEHO QIDSSRE sik Source Heber COMPHST found in source file GNHDEHOLIB QDDSSAC iik Source Heber COMPHST found in source file KEVIN ODDSSRC week Source Heber COHPHST found in source file POFLIB QDDSSAC eekek Source Heber COMPHST found in
92. P Date Selected ATR EQ 6 0 umber of Selected fields File LG CALD Tech Support Evaluation Call Details Responses Selected fields CDLODT 6 0 P Date Selected ATR EQ 6 0 umber of Selected fields File 2 LG CALN Tech Support Evaluation Comments G B amp N Selected fields CNLODT 6 0 P Date Selected ATR EQ 6 0 umber of Selected fields File s LG CALP Tech Support Reps Who Talked to a Selected fields CPLODT 6 0 P Date Selected ATR EQ 6 0 umber of Selected fields File A LG CAL1 Called Clients by Contact Name Selected fields CLCLDT 6 0 P Date Selected ATR EQ 6 0 umber of Selected fields File LG CLD2 Tech Support Evaluation Call Details Responses Selected fields CDLODT 6 0 P Date Selected ATR EQ 6 0 umber of Selected fields File A LG CSTF Calls Stats File Selected fields LDLODT 6 0 P Log Date ATR EQ 6 0 N umber of Selected fields File LG DETF Log Details file Selected fields LDLCDT 6 0 P Log Close Date ATR EQ 6 0 N LDLODT 6 0 P Log Date ATR EQ 6 0 N umber of Selected fields 2 Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports 195 Summary listing of selected files DM 310 This report includes a summary listing of all the files included in the selected analysis LG LG LG LG LG LG LG LG LG LG LG LG LG CAL LG CALP LG CLD2 LG CSTF LG DETL LG DETL4 LG HSTE LG HSTL LG HSTL3 LG OBCF LG OBCL2 LG OBJF LG ORYF LG TSK
93. Print Err to present a panel similar to this one ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E 0 xj File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Library Analysis Errors Object Name s 2 2 2 Object Library LG LIB ALL Name Object Type Display Objects in Error Only Y Y Yes N No 6 Add alternate source reference 7 Add Alt ILE module object library Source Source Source Opt Object Library Type Attr Member File Library ErriId _ LG L367 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG L367 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF402 LG RO1 LG L IB PGM RPG LG RO1 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ LG RI5 LG L IB PGM RPG LG R15 QRPGSRC KEVINH CPF4102 _ L6gR15C LG L IB PGM CLP LG R15C QcLsrc KEVINH CPF4102 _ L6 TMP LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG TMP QRPGLESRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ LG O160LD LG LIB PGM RPG LG 016 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ LG O82C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 082C QcLsrc LG SRC CPF4102 _ LG 319 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG6 319 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF402 _ LG 365 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG 365 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF4102 _ LG 365C LG L IB PGM CLP L6 365C QcLsrc LG UPDLIB CPF4102 _ LG 366 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG 366 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF4102 _ LG 368 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG 368 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF4102 Fii Dsp err msg txt F3 Exit FS Refresh F6 Alt source lib More Fie Cancel F2i Prt anz err rpt B gt 3740 3 40 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 5 5 The advantage to this interface is that while it displ
94. RPG LG LIB LG DETL3 Inp out More F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel 04 23 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPC06S4 4 23 4h 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM FJ Figure 11 14 Explanation of Panel This panel displays a list of programs that use the selected field as well as the file physical or logical from which the field is referenced For example the first line of the panel above indicates that the field was used in the program LG B01 from the logical view LG DETL3 both in the library LG LIB In that instance the field usage was Inp Out ModD Ref Use Below is a description of field usage codes Usage Code Description Inp Input Out Output ModD Modified Directly i e result field of a calculation specification Modl Modified Indirectly i e overlapping DS subfield whose superfield has been modified 176 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Usage Code Description Ref Reference i e used as a Factor 2 of LIKE DEFN Use Used i e just defined to the program Used in Factor 1 or Factor 2 or as an index to array in a result field Program Name Library Type these values to position the list of fields Filter Duplicate Programs This option comes up with an N by default Change it to Y to filter out duplicate entries for the same program Filter Inp Usage This option comes up with an N by default If you change it to Y Docu Mint will filter out
95. SLIBDIR Refresh Library Control may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 20 from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel a Selecting option 11 from Docu Mint menu DM LIB Menu DM LIB can be reached by selecting option 1 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command RSHLIBCTL from a command line The Refresh Library Control command does not use any parameters Simply execute the command from a command line 234 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference SCN Command Parameters Keyword Description STRING Character string to search for IGNCASE Treat lower case as upper case WILD Character that will not be tested for HILITE Hilite found values with this character SRCFILE Source file range SRCLIB Source file library range SRCMBR Source file member range SRCTYPE Source file types to search ORDER Order of results in report created RPTMBRS Report all members even where search string not found IGNCOMM Ignore comment lines JOBD Batch job description Valid values Character string YES NO Character included in STRING value BLANK Source file name GENERIC ALL Source file library name GENERIC ALL Source file member name GENERIC ALL Source file type GENERIC ALL SOURCE STRING YES NO YES NO USRPRF Valid job description The Scan Source command produces a report of character string usage within source members Flexible command options provide a means of
96. Selected fields 13 Program LG L04 Enter Date Range for Stats Selected fields INTERNAL DAT 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL e voo 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL VOO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL WK002 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL WKO04 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL UMDY 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 LG HSTF LHDADT 6 0 P Date Performed ATR EQ 6 0 N LG L04FM WKOO1 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 LG LO04FM WKOO3 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 PSDS JBDT 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 PSDS TIME 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 Number of Selected fields 11 Program LG L11 Enter Date Range for Stats Selected fields INTERNAL DAT 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL e voo 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL VOO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL WKOO2 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL WKO04 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 INTERNAL UMDY 6 0 P ATR EQ 6 0 LG HSTF LHDADT 6 0 P Date Performed ATR EQ 6 0 N LG L11FM WKOO1 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 LG L11FM GWK003 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 PSDS JBDT 6 0 S ATR EQ 6 0 PSDS TIME 6 0 S ATR EQ6 0 N 200 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Program Display file work sheet impact summary FLDTOFLD This option allows you to create a summary report of all the programs and display files impacted by the fields in your analysis When you use this option to generate the report it initially defaults to printing a summary report 11 03 97 9 05 14 Program Change Requirements Work Sheet Page 1 Summary From program CMLIB ALL To pr
97. T is subsequently moved to QRPGSRC in library PRODSRC the object is considered orphaned The report generated will indicate the orphaned object and suggest source member in other locations as being the probable member used to create the object Note that the orphaned objects report produces a listing which includes the status of all objects in the selected library Within this list orphaned objects are identified with appropriate text descriptions If you want a list limited only to objects that are not currently referenced please refer to Option 5 Print Unused Objects Report below Below is an illustration of the panel presented when you select this command ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Print Orphaned Objects PRTORPHOBJ Type choices press Enter Library s ak a ee ws xALLUSR Name ALLUSR for more values Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE xUSRPRF Elea as cep a Ries ca a es Ga Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 KO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 10 Chapter 6 Menu DM 0BJ Object Cross Reference 107 Explanation of Panel Enter a library name or ALLUSR If you want to run the report for more than one specific library type a on the prompt and press Enter
98. UNUSOBJ command is designed to print a list of objects that are not referenced in program calls menus or by any other object in a specified library that has been analyzed The functionality of this command is similar to the PRTORPHOBJ except that PRTORPHOBJ includes existence checks on all objects in its output so generally produces too much information Command Parameters Object Name Library Enter the name and library of the object that you want to check usage of or ALL to run the program over an entire library If you type a specific object name and library and that object is in fact used somewhere the output would report that there were no unused objects satisfying the selected criteria Object Type Enter the type of the object for which you are checking usage Press F4 on this line to present a list of valid object types This command also supports ILE objects Batch Job Description Enter you batch job description or NONE to run the command interactively The PRTUNUSOB is further described in Option 5 Print Unused Objects Report on page 109 REFFLDXREF Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values FRMREFFLD Name of menus to include in report Menu name GENERIC ALL TOREFFLD Explode menu options YES NO JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Reference Field Cross Reference command produces a report by reference field name showing the fields from other files on the system that are ba
99. USER GUIDE Software Version 6 5 User Guide Build 2 For IBM i Docu Mint The Automated Software Documentation Cross Referencing Impact Analysis and Development System Perform impact analysis on your RPG 400 ILE RPG and CL code with Docu Mint the multi award winning IBM i software documentation tool Exclusive Distribution Rights Business Computer Design International Inc 950 York Road Hinsdale IL 60521 USA Phone 630 986 0800 Fax 630 986 0926 E Mail sales bcdsoftware com Web www bcdsoftware com Software Development and Technical Support ExcelSystems Software Development Inc 101 9724 Fourth Street Sidney BC Canada V8L 2Y7 Phone 250 655 1766 Fax 250 655 1733 E Mail excel excelsystems com Web www bcdsoftware com Copyright Notice Docu Mint is a Trademark of Business Computer Design International Inc Program 1988 2011 BCD All rights reserved Exclusive distribution rights Business Computer Design International Inc BCDII Docu Mint User s Guide written and produced by ESDI using Adobe FrameMaker 7 0 Copyright 1988 2011 ESDI All rights reserved This document many not in whole or part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without written consent from ESDI System Requirements Docu Mint 6 5 requires that you have a minimum OS 400 release of V5R3M0 Acknowledgments Throughout this manual reference is made to sev
100. USTMST COVR90 7 2P Over 90 Days amount fields we _ CUSTMST RFCRLI 7 2P Credit limit _ CUSTMST RFLAIN 7 2P Last invoice amount wanted to trap 7 INVENTRY IVLOUN 9 2P Last unit price _ ITEMMST IIUNTP 5 2 P Standard Unit Price we also collected _ ITEMTRN TDATE 6 P Transaction date MMDDYY _ ITEMTRN TATY 5 2P Transaction quantity a number of _ ITEMTRN TSEQ 5 8 Transaction Line F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 0mitted records More other fields that F10 View by field F12 Cancel F2t Print results we werent 1B N ppm particularly 423 KO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nu 5 looking for We could actually eliminate most if not all of the unwanted entries by removing the word Transaction from our TEXT select rule but let s try a couple of other techniques for illustrative purposes The easiest way to eliminate an individual entry from your results is to select option 4 Omit field next to that line Try that for the field TDATE in file ITEMTRN When you press Enter Docu Mint issues a message Selected field is now explicitly omitted Rule detail entry added What this message means is that a new rule has been created which specifically excludes that entry so when you next run the analysis even though it matches other Select criteria it will be excluded from the results You can press F8 from the panel above screen to toggle the view to show records that have been specifically excluded and option 8 from that screen or the
101. VE The Change Library Attributes command is used to change Docu Mint specific attributes associated with a library name Change Library Attributes may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 2 from Docu Mint menu DM CFG Menu DM CFG can be reached by selecting option 4 from menu DM MAIN a Selecting option 14 from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel a Executing the command CHGLIBATR from a command line Command Parameters LIB Specify the name of the library whose Docu Mint related attributes will be changed to the values specified by the remaining parameter values Enter a library name and press Enter to bring up the current attributes associated with the library You may then make any necessary changes and press Enter again to accept the new values Note Many of the following parameters accept the two special values NONE and SAME which work the same way for each parameter NONE will clear Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 209 the attribute associated with the parameter SAME will retain the value of the attribute associated with the parameter GROUP Used to associate a group name to the library By assigning the same group name to a related set of libraries the user may then refer to this set of libraries by a single group name Group names are allowed in the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command This parameter will accept a group name or a special value of NONE or SAME
102. WRKUSEOBJ or WUO Command 0 00 ccc ccc eect eee nen 243 WRKWHRUSE or WWU Command 00 cee ccc eee cece ees 247 INDER ace ceine heise Saad Medes dag E cd as beeathoncens eeeaegueeeerescounoneuee 251 8 Table of Contents SECTION Installation and Tutorial In this Section Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise Introduction amp Installation Instructions What is Docu Mint Docu Mint is a comprehensive software documentation cross referencing and development tool Using Docu Mint you can document your source objects and fields The extended field analysis functions also enable you to locate fields with specific characteristics and determine their relationships to others within your files and programs The first steps you need to take when using Docu Mint are to mark and analyze the libraries that you want to work with The library analysis process populates the internal Docu Mint files with records describing your files programs and other objects as well as the relationships between them all After analyzing your libraries you should review the analysis error report which describes any problems encountered for example missing source members For the most part these errors can be remedied with alternate source references After adding an alternate source reference you can then analyze the library again until you get the best possible results When
103. XGPL affected by or modified by Field THSTDT the fields shown below ffected by thi eld File E PK02H6 LGETSKL9 C 451 00 Z ADOPKO2 THSTDT Commen _ PKO2HE LG TSKLO 454 00 c Z ADOPKOZ ts THSTDT Commen _ ALL O LGsTSKL9 NUHERIC 1795 00 4 MOVEL ALL 0 THSTOT Peys LGSTSKL9 1822 00 C Z ADDEP 0248 THSTDT _ HIVAL LGUTSKL9 2726 00 c HOVEL H TUVAL THSTOT Set hi Bottom E t t FI ance F F l I HA HH KS IH il EXCEL400 EXLPCO8S4 123 W MA HC Terminal encaltO0 vi NS Rauler NUM Figure 11 23 Explanation of Panel This panel displays a list of the fields affected by the field amp DATE in the program GN ADT In this illustration F22 has been pressed to show the actual lines of source code where the field amp DATE affects the value of the others 8 Fields that affect this field From this panel you can also take option 8 again to drill down and see the fields that affect those that affect the original field selected 9 Fields affected by this field You can also use option 9 to see the fields affected by those that affected by the original field selected F22 Fold Unfold Use F22 to display hide the actual line of source referencing the field in question Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 189 190 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Extended Field Analysis Reports Overview Docu Mint features several reports for printing the results of your FILE and PGM analyses To work w
104. a specific text string Using the SCN Scan Source command you can execute searches of up to 10 different strings as well as wild cards You can scan individual source members or groups of members in a source file Add DM LIB to your library list and prompt the SCN command for a snapshot of the available options If have moved the source for some of my programs will Docu Mint find it when it analyzes my object libraries Docu Mint allows you to define alternate source references for just this type of situation Go to the configuration menu DM CFG F17 from the WWL panel and from there select the option to maintain the alternate source definitions file At the panel presented you can set where Docu Mint will look for program source when source files or programs have been moved since the last time the programs were compiled Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions 21 Docu Mint Common Function Keys Several of the screens that Docu Mint presents for working with your output have similar options and function keys Below is a list of those functions and options and how they work Opt Use this field to perform operations on the items in the list You can perform different operations or the same operation on more than one item in the list at a time This field accepts both PDM and Docu Mint user defined options For more information on defining and using options within Docu Mint see Option 13 Maintain the Options C
105. affected fields For example you may want to analyze all programs which reference a specific data area or data structure which have no direct reference to file fields Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 179 Working with Rules for PGM Analyses After you have created a PGM analysis entry you can select option 7 from the Work With Extended Field and Program Analysis panel Figure 11 1 to define and work with field selection rules The panel presented is similar to the one shown below 221302 olx File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith SELECT Rule Detail Analysis 4 Initial analysis of programs in GN LIB Objects analyzed ALL GN LIB Sequence number Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 De lete 5 Display Opt Seq Property Rel Rule details 1 xATR EQ 6 0N 2 xCONSTANT x EQ Start in column 1 10000 01 3 NAME xCT Start in column 1 DAT F3 Exit F4 Lookup F5 Refresh F6 Create F8 View omit rules Bottom F12 Cancel F21 Print 05 24 Al HH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 524 Wo 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM gt Figure 11 16 Explanation of Panel This panel displays the rules defined for the selected analysis Press F8 to toggle between showing the Select rules and the Omit rules To define new selection rules press F6 from this panel Note that when you build multiple rules these are applied with the equivalent to an OR condition
106. ains as an additional parameter an option to collect extended field reference information The keyword for this parameter on the command is FLDXREF and the default is YES This information if collected facilitates the use of the Extended Field Analysis Module option 20 from the Main Menu If the FLDXREF parameter is left as YES a significant number of records will be collected by the STRLIBANZ command which are processed by the Extended Field Analysis Module If you do not intend to use the Extended Field Analysis Module or you have already completed an Extended Analysis you may want to purge the program field cross reference records from this file as they are not used in other Docu Mint modules The CLRPGMXREF command is a stand alone command that allows you to clear program field cross reference data collected by the STRLIBANZ command This command will delete records from this file for a specified library or for all libraries After the records are purged the file is reorganized for optimum performance and DASD utilization This is useful in conserving storage utilization If this data were required at a later date the library would need to be removed via the STRLIBANZ command and subsequently loaded again by the same command Command Parameters LIBRARY This is the library for which the internal field cross reference information will be cleared RGZPFM Select YES to have Docu Mint reorganize the physical file member after removin
107. all the objects in the library XL_EXODUS and the listed components are not called or referenced by any other object in this library Note that the output from this command as from all Docu Mint reports needs to interpreted in conjunction with the Error Analysis Report for the same library which records any errors encountered by STRLIBANZ when analyzing a library For example in the output above the program ZSETDFTUSR is called by the ZSETDFTUSR command which could not be documented because the user running the original analysis wasn t authorized to that object 110 Section IIl Menu Reference Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference The Field Cross Reference Menu allows you to select from several reports that document field usage in your analyzed libraries From this menu you can also access the extended field analysis functions which are described separately in Part IV of this guide The field cross reference reports described in this chapter are useful in instances where you want to know what programs use each field in a selected file or print a list of all the fields in a set of files If you are trying to isolate and list only fields that match certain criteria across a set of files and programs you can build an extended field analysis which is described in Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions You can present the Field Cross Reference Menu using option 3 from the Docu Mint Main Menu or by pressing F15 Fiel
108. alyze programs in LG LIB Object library LG LIB Type information press Enter From program 5G B01 Program name ALL To program LG B01 Program name Report detail 1 1 Detail report including source code impact analysis 2 Summary report of affected programs F12 Cance I Figure 11 20 Explanation of Panel From To Program When you present this window using option 6 the from and to values default to the name of the selected program Valid values are a range of programs or ALL Report Detail Select option 1 to include a source code impact analysis and option 2 to print just a summary report of affected programs Section B of Chapter 9 includes an illustration of the output of the program field cross reference report 186 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions DSPF PRTF Usage Option 7 from Figure 11 19 Fields that are used in display or printer files show a 7 in the second to rightmost column of the list When you select option 7 next to a field for which it is valid Docu Mint presents a list of display or printer files where the field appears The panel presented is similar to the one shown below amp 21302 _ ocx File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display file Printer file Usage Program LG 013 Library a LG LIB Field name LDLODT 6 0 S Log Date Press Enter Reference Reference Reference File Library Format Usage File Library Field LG 013FM LG LIB SUBRCDGG In
109. and Objects 12 Work with obj Select option 12 to present the PDM Work with screen that is appropriate to the object type selected For example for program objects the Work with Objects panel is presented while for files the Work with Files As with the other options this can be configured from the Options Configuration panel F8 14 Create The Create options prompts the system CRT xxx command that is appropriate to the object type selected This can also be configured from the Options Configuration screen Explanation of WWO Functions Below are descriptions of the default functions available from the WWO panel F2 Main Menu Press F2 to present the Docu Mint Main Menu The Main Menu was the initial screen presented in earlier releases of Docu Mint From it you can access all the Docu Mint commands and other menus F3 Exit Press F3 to exit back to the previous panel F4 Prompt F4 is acommand line prompt key To use it type a command on the command line and press F4 F5 Refresh Press F5 to refresh any changes made to the objects list F6 Docobj menu From the Object Documentation Menu you can access the commands to document individual objects Available commands include DOCOBJ DOCCMD etc F8 Options config F8 takes you to the options configuration screens These are described in the section The Work with Used Objects Command on page 67 below F9 Retrieve Press F9 to retrieve the previously executed commands
110. any people is that this means that if you select CUST as your object and ALL as the type the results will reflect usage records for all CUST objects regardless of whether they are programs files data areas etc In reality the OBJTYPE ALL parm will retrieve references to the value ALL for example if you had a command to delete an object with an object type of ALL Because the existing functionality was actually something that people occasionally do use we didn t want to remove that so we had added a new ANY option to this command Using the ANY value for the object type parm will retrieve all references to an object of a given name regardless of the object type 248 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference LIBL Use this parameter to specify the name of a library list to use when Docu Mint resolves child objects This allows the where used list to retrieve and display the child s object attribute text and for physical files the files database relations for automatic inclusion of the file s based on logical files This parameter accepts a named library list or the special value JOB to use the library list of the job executing the WRK WHRUSE command or ALL ALL will include all documented library references without the need to structure a library list or change your current job s library list Note that if you press F18 from the WWU list you can change the library list used by the command and the information will
111. ar those records from the internal files 17 Cmpr pgm info If you are preparing software for distribution or simply want to make sure that the program objects in your production library have been compiled using the latest source code change or reference the correct file layouts the compare program information command will be useful to you This command extracts information about program objects in the library specified It then compares that information with the values identified on the command parameters and generates a report identifying exceptions to the values specified on the command For further details refer to the section CMPPGMINF Command on page 213 of the Command Reference chapters 18 Cmpr dbf refs When preparing software for distribution or moving programs into production it may be necessary to ensure that each program has been compiled over data base files contained in the production library or libraries The CMPPGMDBF command will compare the file libraries referenced in a program object with one or more libraries defined in the command The comparison will highlight any programs that have been compiled using files other than those specified on the command This command does not require the program object library to be analyzed 50 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects For further details refer to the section CMPPGMDBF Command on page 212 of the Command Reference chapters 20 Rfrsh lib cnt Use option 20 to upda
112. are suppressed after the first page This parm accepts a value of NO or YES Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 221 INDRPGSRC Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values SRCMBR Source member name Valid RPG source member SRCFILE Source file name Valid RPG source file STRSEQ Starting sequence number Sequence number low value FIRST CALCS ENDSEQ Ending sequence number Sequence number high value LAST SYMBOL Character used to join matching DO Any valid keyboard character ENDDO commands OUTPUT Controls whether to display or print PRINT PAGEBRK Controls whether to print report NO YES headings at the top of each page HILITE Highlight comment statements YES NO The Indent RPG Source command produces an indented listing of an RPG source member The list will identify related DOxxx END DO IFxx END IF and SELEC WHxx ENDJ SL operation codes connecting them with a separator character and indenting any statements within the structured code Indent RPG Source may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 3 from Docu Mint menu DM UTL Menu DM UTL can be reached by selecting option 4 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command INDRPGSRC from a command line a Type IND onasubfile option line Command Parameters SRCMBR Specify the name of the RPG source member to indent SRCFILE Specify the name of the source file where the RPG source member is located The library qualifier
113. as been deleted from your system or for some reason you don t want your Docu Mint command output to include information from the objects in a specific library Note that the MRKLIB command of itself executes no actions rather the changes are applied the next time you run the STRLIBANZ command When you execute the MRKLIB command or option the panel below is presented iojxi File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Mark Library for Analysis MRKLIB Type choices press Enter Library 2 2 eee Name Action at next analysis LOAD LOAD REMOVE NONE Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel Fi3 How to use this display F24 More keys B gt 5 37 5 37 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 5 2 The MRKLIB command requires only two values the name of the library to mark and the action for which it is being marked Most frequently you will 86 Section III Menu Reference select an action of LOAD unless you need to remove a library from Docu Mint s internal database in which case you can select an action of REMOVE If you select the option to remove an addition option comes up to remove just cross reference information XREF or everything ALL Normally you should select the option ALL Option 2 Start Library Analysis The Start Library Analysis command initiates the analysis of objects and source members within a library This command needs to
114. ase characters A value of YES will treat lowercase characters as uppercase when performing the search A value of NO will enable a case sensitive search WILD The value of this parameter is a character that you can specify in the find string s in positions that should not be tested when scanning for a match When this character appears in the find string any character in the source will be considered a match A value of blank indicates that all characters in the find string take part in the scan If the wild character is the first character in any find string an error will occur HILITE Find string characters will be highlighted within the source data by placing the specified value under each character A blank character will cause the source data to be reported with no highlighting The underline character _ will cause the report to be single spaced with the find string characters to be overprinted with the underline SRCFILE Use the source file parameter to limit the source files to search This parameter works in conjunction with the SRCLIB SRCMBR and SRCTYPE parameters in determining which source members are to be searched This parameter can accept a single source file name a generic name or the special value ALL SRCLIB Use the source file library parameter to limit the source file libraries to search This parameter works in conjunction with the SRCFILE SRCMBR and SRCTYPE parameters in determining which source members a
115. ation of WWL Options 0 0 e cece eee e ene e nen nee 48 Explanation of WWL Functions 0 cece ence een eee eens 51 Working with Analysis Errors 2 0 ccc cece cence eee nen net n enn eees 54 Displaying Library Details incre eie dieni cece cece eee ed 57 Working with Library Groups 0 cece cece eee eee ed 58 Table of Contents 3 Chapter 4 WORKING WITH ANALYZED OBJECTS ccecccccencccceeencccsesesccseesesceseueens 61 Object Information Available at the WWO Panel 0000 e ee 62 Explanation of WWO Options 0 00 e cence nett n een e ed 63 Explanation of WWO Functions 0 e cece eee eee nent e tees 65 The Work with Used Objects Command 0 eee eee eee es 67 Using the Work with Used Objects Display 0 e cece eee 68 Using the Subset Work with Used Objects Display 005 71 Using the Change Session Defaults Display 0 0 e eae 72 The Work with Where Used Command 0 00 cece cece eee eee 74 Using the Work with Where Used Display 0 0 0 c cece eee ees 75 Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display 00 0 000s 77 Using the Change Session Defaults Display 0 e cece eee nee 78 Customizing the WWL and WWO Options 0 ccc eee ene 80 Customizing the DEFAULT Options 0 c cece eee eee eee 80 Chapter 5 MENU DM LIB LI
116. atted or ALL to format all the members in the selected source file Copy member before conversion Select this option if you want to make a backup copy of the source member to be converted before executing the conversion If you select YES for this option when you press Enter an additional option is presented allowing you to specify a member name source file and library to copy to Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 217 Remove spec from comments Set this option to YES to remove the spec C D etc from comment lines Make C comments lower case This option allows you to change all your C spec comments to lower case Highlight C specs Use this to indicate that you want to highlight the C specs in your source member s DOCOBJ or DOCxxx Commands Parameters Keyword Description Valid values OBJ Any OS 400 object OS 400 object name OBJTYPE Any OS 400 object type This parmis Valid OS 400 object type available for DOCOBJ only JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Document Objects command and related commands DOCCMD DOCFILE DOCMENU DOCPGM DOCPROC DOCQRY and DOCUSRPREF initiates an analysis of an object or group of objects of a single type within a library The same degree of analysis is done as that produced by the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command the difference being that all objects requested by a DOCxxx command will be analyzed even if the object was successfully analyzed previo
117. ay or rename named library lists You can press F21 from this panel to print a report of all your library lists and libraries The Library List report is created with the following spool file attributes u Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT o User data USRDTA WrkLibI The following sections describe how to create and maintain your lists 134 Section Ill Menu Reference Creating New Library Lists Press F6 from the Work with Library Lists panel to present the following window allowing you to key in a new library list to be created Create Library List Library list Text Retrieve from jobd Name JOB NONE Library Enter Create Fi2 Cancel Figure 9 5 Library List Type a Library List name and text description then press Enter to go on to the Edit Library List display described below If you enter the name of an existing library list it will presented for you to work with Text Enter a character string of up to 50 characters to describe the library list If you are retrieving the library list from a job description see below leaving this prompt blank will retrieve the library list text from the job description text Retrieve from jobd Specify the name of the job description whose initial library list should be used as the basis for the list to be created The possible values are a NONE No job description is retrieved The initial library list will be empty a JOB The current job s library list
118. ays the same information as the report it also includes useful shortcuts for adding alternate source and ILE module object library references The Display Library Analysis Errors panel is described in detail in the section Working with Analysis Errors on page 54 of Chapter 3 90 Section III Menu Reference Option 4 Clear Extended Program Field Analysis Records By default Docu Mint collects extended field analysis information every time you analyze a library Due to the volume and detail of this information the Docu Mint internal files may grow larger than you like in which case the file can be cleared When you clear these files you can no longer use the Extended Field Analysis functions in Docu Mint options 20 and 21 from the Main Menu but all other commands and options will still work fine Option 4 from the DM LIB menu allows you to run the CLRPGMXREF command to clear the files After the records are purged the file can be reorganized for optimum performance and DASD utilization This is useful in conserving storage utilization If this data is required at a later date you need to mark the library for removal and analysis using the MRKLIB STRLIBANZ cycle and subsequently load the library again by the same mechanism Below is an illustration of the panel presented when you select this option ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Clear Pgm Fld XRe
119. by field name or by file field Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 175 F21 Print results F21 presents a prompt similar to option 6 except defaulting to low and high values for the from and to files Field Where Used Information Option 7 By selecting option 7 next to a field at the Work With SELECTED Field Entries panel above you can present where used information for each of the fields selected by the analysis For example when we select option 7 next to the field LGLODT Log Date above the panel below is presented 21302 OL x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Field Usage Selected field LDLODT Program name H Filter duplicate programs N Y Yes Library Filter Inp usage N Y es Type options press Enter 5 Display Opt Program Type File Field usage _ LG LIB LG B01 APG LG LIB LG DETL3 Inp Out HodD Ref Use _ LG LIB LG B11 RPG LG LIB LG DETL2 Inp Out ModD Ref Use _ LG LIB LG R01 APG LG LIB LGHDETL2 Inp Out ModD Ref Use _ LG LIB LG R02 RPG LG LIB LG DETF Inp _ LG LIB LG R04 xRPG LG LIB LG DETL2 Inp out Ref Use _ LG LIB LG R06 APG LG LIB LGHDETL2 Inp Out HodD Ref Use _ LG LIB LG RO07 RPG LG LIB LG CSTF Inp out _ LG LIB LG R10 APG LG LIB LGHDETL2 Inp Out Ref Use LG LIB LG R11 xRPG LG LIB LG DETF Inp out Ref Use _ LG LIB LG R12 RPG LG LIB LG DETF Inp Out ModD Ref Use _ LG LIB LG R13 RPG LG LIB LG DETL3 Inp out _ LG LIB LG R14
120. c Library 2 ee gt DM DEMOL IB PRY ALL name Parent object type gt PGM PRV ALL CMD MENU Display generic usage PRV PRV ALL DLT EXC Display child object type PRV PRV ALL type Display child object type ALL PRY PRV YES NO Display child object type VAR PRV PRV YES NO Library list 2 PRV PRV JOB name Treat blank library name as PRV PRV name LIBL CURLIB Treat variable library name as PRV PRV name LIBL CURLIB Display library name PRV PRV ACTUAL RESOLVE Maximum explosion level 1 NOMAX 0 99 Indent pattern PRV PRV pattern Columns to indent xPRY PRV 1 2 3 Output o e io a we we ww ee PRINT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fi2e Cancel Fi3 How to use this display F24 More keys B gt 5 37 5 37 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 4 2 When you select this option from the Work with Analyzed Objects panel the parent object name library and type are filled in for you All the remaining parameters except the Maximum explosion level and the Output default to PRV indicating that command will use the parameter values from the last time it was executed For a detailed description of all the command parameters please refer to the section WRKUSEOBJ or WUO Command on page 243 of Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference Chapter 4 Working with
121. c4sccicevads ceaad ces ade catwa ves cues a aah 216 DOCILESRC Command seiere ree sannari eia Ee Er EE eee ee ees 217 DOCOBJ or DOCxxx Commands 0000 cece eee eees 218 DSPFRLAY O Command recited deb Soh aia Pep Bek Aa oO ELA 219 INDCLSRG Commando sesio t occu tists E AE satel Seemed niente Be 220 INDRPGSRC Command mesas eA i 000 ccc ccc cece nent ene e a aa 222 EDA Command essei es Se apudiscis dao peee e Be Siw ddd alse db Seeded 224 MRKEIB Commands isso vind sade tea a i Aarne so eH bane 224 PGMEXPINQ Command 0 ccc ccc ccc cnet en es 225 PGMFLDXREF Command 0 0 0 0 00 ccc ccc ene errore 226 PRTANZERR Command siipeen enon cc ccc cece cece ene es 227 PRTMNUEXP Command e nno 00 n eens 228 PRTORPHOBJ Command 0 00 ccc ccc cect eee nee ns 229 PRTPGMEXP Command cc ccc ccc cece eee e nee e en eneneens 230 PRTUNUSOBJ Command 00 0 ccc ccc cece cece eens 232 REFFLDXREF Command 000 ccc ccc eee eee n E eens 232 RSHLIBCNT Command 0 ccc ccc ccc cece enn A a 234 RSHLIBE GE Command asee cies E ete tig Oho ces ere E Motes oe 234 Table of Contents 7 SGN Gomimand 20 54 ieee ales Gor tees ie ee bale ls hele ben tnt ty 235 STRLIBANZ Command 00 kana raia cece eect eee eens 238 WRKANZCMD Command 000 cece cee ccc cence eens 240 WRKLIBIE Command reirast eee ee 4a sale ee aha AE RE 242 WRKPGMELD Command 0 000 cece cc cence cence en nees 242
122. ce 125 using the command 125 INDRPGSRC 150 command reference 222 Indent RPG Source 126 using the command 126 Initial Panel configuring STRDOC command 46 Inp 176 Inp Usage filtering in an analysis 177 Installation components installed 14 Internal Files clearing excess records 211 maintaining and updating 145 J Job description default value for submitted jobs 209 LDA command reference 224 254 Index Edit Local Data Area 128 using the command 128 Library changing attributes 48 copying 48 creating groups for analysis 133 displaying library object details 57 grouping libraries together for analysis 58 grouping together with others 50 starting analysis 49 working with analysis errors 49 54 working with lists 47 Library Attributes changing 133 209 Library Control File 92 Library Groups creating and working with 58 Library Lists working with 134 library lists working with named lists 134 Library selection and analysis 85 Local Data Area editing 128 Logical Files including results automatically in WWU on physical 247 M Main Menu Option 3 Field Cross Reference Menu 111 Option 5 Configuration Menu 131 Marking Libraries for Analysis 86 from the WWL panel 49 Menu Documentation Menu 148 Menu Explosion Report 149 menu images report 228 menu options printing a list 149 ModD 176 ModI 176 MRKLIB command reference 224 MRKLIB Command 86 Named Library Lists working with 134 0 Object Documenta
123. ce Search Look In Source File Library Sequ File Library QRGPLESRC2 DM DEMOL IB MRPGLESRC_ DM DEMOLIB 0 F3 Exit Fie Cancel The actual source locations for these programs is the file oa2PcLESRC2 in DM DEMOLIB After adding this new rule you can quickly mark option 8 and analyze option 6 the library once more to finish collecting our results Once that job has finished and you have confirmed that the library was fully analyzed this time we re ready to start working with our analysis results Start by selecting 1g 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj xj r Fie Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help option 1 next to Docu Mint Work With Analyzed Objects V6ROMO DM DEMOLIB Library OM DEMOL IB Position to z Position to type This presents the Type options press Enter K 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display Work with 7 Rename 8 WRKHHRUSE HRKUSEOBJ 10 Analyze object i Object Library Type attr Src File Size Owner Analyzed Objects __ COMPMST DM DEMOL IB F ILE PF 40960 Bytes QPGMR wwo 1 __ CUSTMST DM DEMOL IB F ILE PF 81920 Bytes QPGMR panel DDITLK DM DEMOL IB MODULE RPGL 425984 Bytes OPGHR ill d __ DDITLK DM DEMOLIB SRCM RPGLE ORPGLESRC2 1615 Records illustrated at __ DDITLKFM DM DEMOLIB F ILE DSPF 20480 Bytes QPGMR A __ DDITLKFM DMHDEMOLIB SRCM DSPF QDDSSRC 268 Records right __ DDORDD DM DEMOL IB BNDDIR 8192 Bytes QPGMR
124. code INDRPGSRC 6 Format ILE RPG source member DOCILESRC 7 Program Explosion Report PRTPGMEXP 8 Program Explosion Inquiry PGMEXP INQ 90 Sign Off Selection or command gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 E gt az K Figure 10 5 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Options 1 2 amp 3 Document Programs ILE RPG Modules and Service Programs These options initiate an analysis of a program module or service program or set of these The same degree of analysis is done as that produced by the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command the difference being that all objects requested by a DOCxxx command will be analyzed even if the object was successfully analyzed previously and has not been changed or recompiled since Option 4 Indent CL Source The Indent CL Source command INDCLSRC produces an indented listing of a CLP source member The list will identify related DO ENDDO commands Chapter 10 Menu DM ANZ Object Documentation 149 connecting them with a separator character and indenting any commands nested within the DO ENDDO pair Option 5 Indent RPG Source The Indent RPG Source command INDRPGSRC produces an indented listing of an RPG or RPGLE source member The list will identify related DOxxx END DO IFxx END IF and SELEC WHxx END SL operation codes connecting t
125. cting 12 from the menu DM CFG option 5 from the Docu Mint Main Menu Option 7 presents a window allowing you do add a single entry and option 12 from DM CFG displays a panel similar to this one Mox Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Alt ILE module object libs Type the ILE module object library as retrieved from PGM and SRVPGM objects and the alternate library to locate the module during analysis 4 Delete Search ILE Module Aternate Opt Seqt Object Lib Object Lib _ 1 00 GN L IB GN SRC Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi Top Fi8 Bottom B gt 9 4 94 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0100 via Telnet NUM y Figure 3 4 To add new records type fields values into a new line in the list To add new empty lines to the bottom of the list press F18 Bottom Search Seq If you have multiple alternate entries for a library you can use the sequence to number to determine the order in which alternate libraries are searched 56 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Generally you would add the most likely candidates with lower sequence numbers ILE Module Object Lib This is the expected module library as determined by checking the program Alternate Object Lib Type the name of the actual library where the module resides Displaying Library Details Option 5 from the Work with System Libraries panel allows you to see a summary listing of the obje
126. ction or command F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 HWork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 2 7 fo Figure 8 1 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet The remainder of this chapter describes each of these utilities in detail Please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference for a complete description each of the parms for the above commands The RSHLIBCNT and RSHLIBCTL options 5 and 6 options may also be accessed from the menu DM LIB and are described at the end of Chapter 5 Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis as well as in Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Option 1 Scan Source The Scan Source option SCN command produces a report of character string usage within source members Flexible command options provide a means of specifying both how to perform the search such as whether or not to ignore case and the ability to specify a wild card character as well as what source to search generic support is provided for source file name source library name source member name and source type A unique feature of the command allows the user to request that strings found within comments not appear on the report The options you are prompted for when you run this command are illustrated below ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Scri
127. cts in the selected library sorted by object type Below is an illustration of this panel ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal o xl Eile Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Library Summary Library a aoc aoe ak a eR LG LIB Object Tyee 1 eee ALL Library Group None Analysis Date Time 1 09 22 2001 13 10 26 Total Object Count 533 Type options press Enter ssHork with objects Object Ob ject Opt Type Count _ CMD 4 _ DTAARA 1 FILE 248 _ MENU 2 _ xMSGF 2 PGM 276 Bottom F3 Exit Fo Refresh Fi0 Display objects LE gt 13 3 13 3 Ao IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 3 5 The illustration above displays a summary of the objects in the library LG LIB You can position the list by typing the object type at the top of the screen or type a new library name to switch to a different library The headings also display some additional library details including u The group the library belongs to u The last time the library was analyzed a The total object count Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 57 To work with the details of each type of object you can select option 5 next to an entry This will present the PDM Work with screen appropriate to the entry type selected For example option 5 on CMD entries presents the Work with Objects Using PDM screen with the list constrained t
128. d Log Text File Log Text File by Date Log and Line Log Task X reference File Task Call X ref by Task View by task num and log 196 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions File program impact analysis summary DM 311 A Li Q Li L QRPGSRC LG 061 QRPGSRC LG 107 QRPGSRC LG 302 This option prints a file change impact analysis report This report includes a list of all the files in the selected analysis and the programs which reference them 0 29 97 16 00 58 File Change Impact Analysis Report Page 1 nalysis 1 FILE Analyze files in LG LIB Date Analyzed 2007 10 19 11 35 50 Objects LG LIB ALL ile G CAL DDSSRC LG CAL No programs reference G CALD No programs reference G CLTF No programs reference G CLTF6 No programs reference LG CLTJ1 No programs reference LG CLTL1 LG db LG db LG d b LG db LG db LG LG B01 LG B04 LG R01 LG R06 LG R13 LG 0B2 LG 001 LG 002 LG 005 LG 006 LG 009 LG 010 LG 012 LG 013 LG 015 LG 016 LG 017 LG 018 LG 026 LG 027 LG 043 LG 044 LG 060 LG 061 LG 107 LG 302 LG 305 LG 306 LG 307 Library ProgramLibraryTypeTextSource_Lib File Mbr LIB P thi BP thi BP thi BL thi BL thi ey Rs Oe Re eS heh De RS LG L LG L LG L LG L LG L 10 al W w www w w w ess w Clients Contacts called for evalua
129. d WRKUSEOB is described in the command reference chapter and also in the section Option 2 Work with Used Objects on page 94 of Chapter 6 How do I find out what programs use a file that has changed Use the WRKWHRUSE command option 8 from the Work with Analyzed Objects screen see instructions above on how to get there This is described in the command reference chapter and also in the section Option 3 Work with Where Used on page 101 of Chapter 6 How can I display a list of all the objects on my system Run the WWO command or select option 1 next to any of your libraries from the Work with System Libraries panel and type a library name of ALL in the library prompt at the top of the panel When should use the Field Cross Reference reports Menu DM FLD as opposed to building an Extended Field Analysis The field cross reference reports PGMFLDXREFE etc should be used when you want to see a complete cross reference listing between all the fields in a file or set of files and a set of programs These are described in Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference Build an extended field analysis when you want to find only fields that satisfy some specific criteria in a set of files and or programs Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions describes how to build and use extended field analyses How do I print a list of unused objects You can use the command PRTUNUSOBJ to do this Keep in mind that the information
130. d Menu from the Work with System Libraries panel Below is an illustration of menu DM FLD sit xi File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM FLD Business Computer Design VGROMO Docu Mint Field Cross Reference Menu DEMO 1 Program Field Cross Reference Report PGMFLDXREF 2 Database File Field Cross Reference Report DBFFLDXREF 3 Reference Field Cross Reference Report REFFLDXREF 4 Work with Program Field Usage WRKPGMFLD 20 Work With Extended Field Analysis HRKFLDANZ 90 Sign Off Selection or command F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve Fi4 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fi2 Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 21 7 2 7 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM z Figure 7 1 Select the option for the report you want or press F3 to return to the Main Menu The following sections of this chapter describe each of these reports in detail Option 1 Program Field Cross Reference Report The Program Field Cross Reference report produces a listing of field usage within RPG or ILE RPG programs When running this report you can cross reference up to ten sets of files across programs in up to ten separate RPG source files For each field in the file s specified the report will list the name of the RPG program s referencing the field or NONE if no programs use the field along with a mnemonic indicating how the field is used within that particular program
131. d Objects Type options press Enter WRKUSEOBJ 2 Edit 3 Copy 4 Delete 5S Display 7 Rename 8 Display desc Opt Object Library Type attr Seq Usage Text command over DMCOMP DMHDEMOLIB PGM ALL Ho DMCOMP DM DEMOLIB PGM RPGLE Parent Hork with the program DMCMPKFM DM DEMOLIB FILE DSPF INP OUT Maintain C DMORDE ith QRNXIE asys SRVPGM CLE CALL Wit QRNXIO asys SRVPGM CLE CALL QRNXUTIL asys SRVPGM CLE CALL an explosion __ QLEANT asys SRVPGM SYS CALL ____ DMCOMPFM DMHDEMOLIB FILE DSPF 76 00 UPD Hork with level of 3 F UPDAT LIBL FILE 80 00 INP OUT File not f COMPMST PDFLIB70 FILE PF 82 00 INP Company ma g DMCMPK DM DEMOLIB MODULE RPGL 681 00 CALLB Maintain C Using the DMCUST DMHDEMOLIB PGM RP6LE 687 00 CALL Working wi _ 1 QRNXIE asys SRVPGM CLE CALL i i QRNXIO asys SRVPGM CLE CALL display atr ight l 1 QRNXUTIL asys SRVPGM CLE CALL gt More you can enter a F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve Fe3 More options F24 More keys new parent C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 8 2 object name lib IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nu 5 type to reload the list according to revised or subsetted criteria For example if you type DMMENU for the object name the list is dynamically rebuilt to display that as the parent object This is useful where you have run the original command over a broad range of parent objects and later want to focus in o
132. d RNMOBJ Rename Object which allows you to change the library name 8 Mark lib LOAD When you select option 8 Docu Mint prompts the MRKLIB command with a default option of LOAD This is the first step required in the analysis process before starting the actual library analysis with the STRLIBANZ command or option 6 For additional details refer to the section MRKLIB Command on page 224 of the Command Reference section 9 Mark lib RMV Option 9 prompts the Docu Mint command MRKLIB REMOVE which can be used as the first step in clearing library information from Docu Mint When the command prompt appears you can select from the remove options XREF and ALL which clear different levels of information from the internal files For additional details refer to the section MRKLIB Command on page 224 of the Command Reference section 10 View print err After you have finished analyzing a library you should always check the analysis errors report which lists any problems encountered documenting the objects in the selected libraries The most common analysis error is when Docu Mint can t find the source for an object While the software can extract certain types of information from an object itself for some objects a more complete analysis requires that the source also be documented So if the source for an object is not found an analysis error is logged The panel presented when you select option 10 allows you to work with the err
133. d is used to flag a library to be loaded into or optionally removed from Docu Mint s cross reference files by a subsequent run of the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command Marking a library takes only a few seconds and does not do any analysis of the library s contents Any number of libraries may be marked during the course of the day and then analyzed by a single execution of Start Library Analysis No harm is done if a library is marked multiple times before it is finally analyzed and will only be analyzed once After the library has been loaded or removed by running the Start Library Analysis command the library s flag will automatically be cleared If any errors occur during the library analysis the library s load or remove flag will be retained Mark Library may be initiated in one of the following ways u Selecting options 8 LOAD or 9 REMOVE from the Work with System Libraries panel a Selecting option 1 from Docu Mint menu DM4LIB Menu DM LIB can be reached by selecting option 1 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command MRKLIB from a command line 224 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Command Parameters LIB Specify the name of the library to be flagged for later analysis ACTION Indicates what action to take if the library is selected by the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command This parameter value is the same value as that used by the Change Library Attributes CHGLIBATR command Valid entr
134. d libraries only N Y Yes N No Type options press Enter 1 Hrk u anz objs 2 Change lib 3 Copy 4Delete S Display detail 6 Start lib anz T Renane Setark lib LOAD S Hark lib RU 10 Vieu print err 12 Hork with obj 14Chg lib attrs Analysis Lst Anz Lst Anz Total Library Opt Library Hark Group sg Id Date Tine Objects Deser iption Diale LOAD Mone 09 21 2001 09 29 48 574 Docu Hint DH NEULIB lone 10 01 2001 15 45 19 50 Docu nint new objects DH NEKSRC Hlone 10 01 2001 15 45 26 7 Docunint neu enhancenents features __ DHAPREP Hone 10 01 2001 15 46 05 8 Pons in DH LIB with RTUCLSRC set to yes __ DAKSRE lone 10 01 2001 15 46 42 34 Docu Hint Source __ OMIPOLIB lone 10 01 2001 15 47 01 13 Dn lib update library DHRUPDSRC lone 10 01 2001 15 47 09 9 Docu nint update source Dham OAD Hone ACTIVE Hever 48 Docu Hint Utility Library DHFI 405 lone lever 0 DHS36SRC Alone lever 1 Docu Hint Systen 36 Environment Production __ DOCS36UPD lone lever 11 DOCUHINT lone lever 317 Docu Hint Systen 36 Env ironnent __ OS 0EU Hlone lever 4 Debugger using APIs dev Iib Hore Fe tlain nenu F3 Enit F4 Pronpt Fo Refresh F6 4H lib groups F RSHLIBCTL F ptions config F9 Retrieve F10 Lib nenu Fi2 Cancel Feastlore opts Fe4store keys E 10 3 10 3 Wo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 3 1 46 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Using the WWL Panel The Work with System Libraries panel prese
135. ded Number or Nbr The panel presented for the QNAME selection includes the file and field names This rule is generally used for fields that satisfy one of the other selection criteria but are not the type of field that you are specifically trying to track For example in a search for 6 0 N dates your analysis might include a single Company Number field with those attributes Because there was only one occurrence of this field in your output it would be easier to explicitly omit it than build an entirely new rule to do the same Using option 4 from your field listing you can have Docu Mint build an explicit QNAME omit rule Omitting Selected Fields After building your list of selected fields and adding omission rules to eliminate groups of unwanted records you can go through and select an option 4 Omit to omit specific fields from the list When you do this Docu Mint creates a QNAME omission rule for that field Once a field has been omitted it can also be re selected which results in an explicit QNAME rule being created for that field If you omit fields that you later realize you need to include you can toggle the list of fields to those that are omitted and use option 4 Select to build an explicit QNAME rule to include the field back in the analysis 170 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions TEXT Selection Field Text Another rule class you can define for FILE Selects is TEXT to evaluate field text
136. e Command Parameters FILE Specify up to ten sets of files whose fields should be cross referenced with the fields specified in the Field name FIELD parameter Each parameter occurrence can accept a single file name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry can accept a library name or one of the following special values LIBL USRLIBL or ALLUSR FIELD Specify up to ten sets of field name values to be cross referenced with the files specified in the File name FILE parameter Each parameter occurrence can accept a single field name a generic name or the special value ALL JOBD Specify the name of the batch job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRE The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the special value NONE is not recommended Database File Field Cross Reference Report The Database File Field Cross Reference report is created with the following spool file attributes a Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT u User data USRDTA DbfFldXref Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 215 DBFLAYO Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values FILE Files to include in the report File name GENERIC ALL FILETYPE Physical Logical or all files DBF PF LF JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The
137. e FROMMBR Remove spec from comments ES YES NO Make C comments lower case YES YES NO Highlight C Specs xYES YES NO Batch job description QBATCH Name NONE Library 2 2 eee eee LIBL Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 7 37 7 37 KO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 8 8 Chapter 8 Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities 129 Type the name of your source file and library and the source member to format You can also use the special value ALL to format all source members in the selected file Copy member before conversion Select this option if you want to make a backup copy of the source member to be converted before executing the conversion If you select YES for this option when you press Enter an additional option is presented allowing you to specify a member name source file and library to copy to Remove spec from comments Set this option to YES to remove the spec C D etc from comment lines Make C comments lower case This option allows you to change all your C spec comments to lower case Highlight C specs Use this option to indicate that you want to highlight the C specs in your source member s 130 Section Ill Menu Reference Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration The Docu Mint Configuration Menu includes several options related to configuring h
138. e specified library Comparison DBF object library Type the name of the library or libraries used to compare against the data base file library referenced by the program To enter more libraries type a in the library name and press enter A maximum of 10 libraries can be used for comparison Program objects to print ERR will print an exception report listing only those programs that references files in libraries other than those specified in the command ALL will print all programs identifying those in error Batch job description Type the name of the job description referenced on the submit job command This will identify the job queue that the process is submitted to Type NONE if you want to run this process interactively 212 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference CMPPGMINF Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values PGMNAM Program name amp lib to be analyzed Pgm Name Generic or ALL CMPREL Compare target OS 400 release level NO value in format VxRxMx CMPSRCL Compare to specific source library NONE source library name CMPOBS Flag observable programs YES NO CMPLOGCL _ Flag CL programs with logging YES NO CMPRTVCLS Flag programs with RTVCLSRC YES NO CMPSRC Compare objects to source date YES NO PRTALL Print a listing of all programs or only ALL ERR errors JOBD Batch job description Job description name NONE If you are preparing software for distribution or simply want to make sure tha
139. e Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Oocu Hint Hork With Systen Libraries VERONO Position Wa ai 2 Analyzed libraries only N Y Yes N Ho Type options press Enter t irk u anz objs 2 Change lib 3 Copy Delete SeDisplay detail G Start lib anz T Renane Setark lib LOAD 9 Hark lib RIU 10 Vieu print err 12 Hork with obj 14Chg lib attrs Analysis Lst Anz LstAnz Total Library Opt Library Hark Group Hsg Id Date Tine Objects Deser iption _ WALT LOAD Mone 09 21 2001 09 29 48 574 Docu Hint ONANENLIB Hone 10 01 2001 15 45 19 50 Docu nint neu objects DHHNELSRC lone 10 01 2001 15 45 26 7 Docunint new enhancenents features DIAPREP lone 10 01 2001 15 46 05 8 Pgns in DH LIB uith RTUCLSRC set to yes __ DHASRC lone 10 01 2001 15 46 42 34 Docu Hint Source __ DMAUPOLIB lone 10 01 2001 15 47 01 13 Dretl ib update library __ DNHUPDSRE lone 10 01 2001 15 47 09 9 Docu nint update source __ Di LOAD Mone ACTIVE Hever 48 Docu Hint Utility Library __ ONFIRA0S lone lever 0 DHS36SRC lone Hever 1 Docu Hint Systen 36 Environnent Production __ DOCS3BUPD Hlone Hlever 11 DOCUHINT lone lever 317 Docu Hint Systen 36 Environnent DS 0El lone lever 4 Debugger using APIs dev Iib gt Hore Festain nenu F3 Enit F4 Pronpt F Refresh F6 HH lib groups F RSHLIBCTL F Options config F9Retrieve F10 Lib nenu Fi2 Cancel Fe3 Hore opts Fe4stlore keys B 10 3 103 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Figure 1 2 The first step
140. e File Layouts Report The Database File Layouts report is created with the following spool file attributes Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT and User data USRDTA DBFLayo DOCILESRC Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values SRCFIL Source file and library Source file and library name or LIBL SRCMBR Source member name ALL existing ILE source member COPYMBR_ Copy member before conversion YES NO CPYSRCFIL Copy to source file if YES above QCPYLESRGC source file and library CPYTOMBR Copy to member name FROMMBR member name RMVSPEC Remove spec from comments YES NO CVTOLWR_ Make C comments lower case YES NO HILITE Highlight C specs YES NO JOBD Batch job description QBATCH job description name NONE The DOCILESRC command is used to enhance ILE source code typically source code that has recently been converted to ILE using IBM s CVTRPGSRC When you run DOCILESRC over an ILE source member the following changes are made a Field definitions are consolidated into D Specs a Comment lines are converted to high intensity a IF and DO structures are documented etc If you have any concerns about the changes made to your source member you can also select an option to copy the selected member before executing the changes Command Parameters Source File and Library Type the source file and library containing the ILE member s to be formatted Source Member Name Enter the name of the source member to be form
141. ect is STRSEU SRCFILE amp srclib amp f SRCMBR amp srcembr OPTION 2 Refer to the Options Configuration section for additional details on how to customize your options and the replacement values supported 3 Copy Use option 3 to copy an existing object You can customize the command string executed by the copy option depending on the object type selected The default command string is 2 CRTDUPOBJ OBJ amp n FROMLIB amp 1l OBJTYPE amp t So when you select option 3 the CRTDUPOBJ command is prompted defaulting in as many command parms as are relevant 4 Delete Option 4 physically deletes an object on your system When you do this Docu Mint will change the object description information to reflect that the object is no longer found on the system To remove the record entirely you need to Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 63 mark the library REMOVE ALL analyze then mark it LOAD and analyze again 5 Display Select option 5 to display object information Like the change and copy options you can configure the display option to be sensitive to the object type in what it executes 7 Rename Use option 7 to invoke the Rename Object command RNMOB or the appropriate rename command to the object type selected For example the Rename Member RNMM command is used when you select a source member 8 WRKWHRUSE Option 8 prompts the Work with Where Used command for the selected object This f
142. ed objects This is where Docu Mint s Alternate Source Definitions come into play Through the use of alternate source definition records you are able to suggest alternative source locations for the objects residing on your system Use Option 11 from the Docu Mint Configuration Menu to set up the alternate source definitions You can also add alternate source references from the Display Library Analysis Records panel option 10 from the WWL screen An alternate source definition record consists of the following information u The name and library of a source file objects were compiled from a A search sequence number u The name and library of an alternate source file Docu Mint should look in for objects compiled from the Compiled From source Docu Mint uses this information when it is analyzing an object and the object s source is needed for the analysis If the source from the object s object description service attributes is not found Docu Mint then begins searching the Look In source of the alternate source definition records whose Compiled From source matches that from the object description The source sequence number controls the order in which equivalent Compiled From records are processed When you select option 11 from the menu DM CFG the panel initially presented is similar to the one shown below If you have already defined some 138 Section Ill Menu Reference alternate source entries th
143. ed FILE analyses 178 creating 178 overview 156 reports 193 rules 180 PGM and FILE Analyses relationship 179 QNAME Selection Qualified Select Omit Rule 170 REMOVE marking libs to clear internal xref en tries 87 TEXT Selection Field Text 171 TYPE Selection Field Type 172 Numerics 132 Column Mode WWL screen 47 A ACTIVATE installing security codes 16 Alternate ILE Module Object Libs adding 56 Alternate Source File References adding 55 maintaining the alt source definitions file 138 Analysis Errors working with 49 54 Analysis Results FILE 173 Analysis Rules 162 Analyzed Objects working with 61 working with from WWL panel 48 Analyzing Libraries grouping together 58 Analyzing Specific Objects 146 ANZCLP work with command analyzed by 240 Attributes selecting fields by these 165 C CFGSTRDOC setting initial STRDOC panel 46 Index 251 Change Data Area see CHGDTAARA Changed Objects re analyzing 146 Changing library attributes 209 character string usage 124 CHGDOCCTL Change Docu Mint Control Data 132 command reference 207 using the command 132 CHGDOCDFT command reference 208 CHGDTAARA 128 CHGLIB executing from the WWL panel 48 CHGLIBATR change library attributes menu option 133 command reference 209 executing from the WWL panel 50 using the command 133 CLP source member 125 CLRPGMXREF command reference 211 executing from the WWL panel 50 CMPPGMDBF executing from the WWL panel
144. ed in for you The first two values tell you where the program was compiled from and you need to fill in the last two where the source actually exists now When creating a new rule we also default the same source file name into the Look in Source File value but you can change this if that isn t the case Alternate source file references and their usage are described in the section Option 11 Maintain the Alternate Source Definitions File on page 138 of Chapter 9 Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 55 After you define an alternate source reference mark and analyze the library once more refresh your results When the analysis finished check back at this panel to see if you have succeeded in eliminating all possible errors and add any other necessary alternate source references Adding Alternate ILE Module Object Libs When program objects are created the may contain bound modules The modules in fact are the objects that contain all the pertinent information indicating the source file and member and all the other details necessary to perform source code analysis If the MODULE objects have been moved to a library other than what is specified in the program object the alternate module library entry will direct the analysis process where to find the module You can add alternate ILE module object libs by selecting option 7 from the Display Library Analysis Errors panel described in the section immediately above or by sele
145. ed library names as determined by Docu Mint Pressing F14 is equivalent to flipping the Display library name parameter from ACTUAL to RESOLVE or vice versa F16 Position to Toggles between positioning the display to the top of the list and the bottom of the list Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 69 F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See Using the Subset Work with Used Objects Display below for further information F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information F21 Print list Prints the current form of the list Options 10 Document Use option 10 to execute the DOCOBJ command for any entry in a used objects listing This command is useful for refreshing changed information in already analyzed libraries or when the listing includes an object that itself has not been previously analyzed The remaining options are similar to those available from PDM 70 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Using the Subset Work with Used Objects Display Press F17 from the WUO panel or the Change Session Defaults panel to display the Subset Work with Used Objects panel From here you can make changes to the parameters which control the amount of i
146. eld File This is the name of the file the field was found in This value will be ALL unless the field was found in an internally described file s input or output specification Program Library The name of the program the field is used in Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 119 Attr A one character field designating the program attribute Usage Indicates how the field is used in the program Below is a list of the values that may be specified for this entry Usage Values Description Inp Used in a file s input specification Out Used in a file s output specification ModD Modified Directly Used in result field of calculation specification Ref Referenced Used as factor 2 of LIKE DEFN Use Used in factor 1 or factor 2 or as index to array in result field Exclude INP Only Fields This value at the upper right of the panel allows you to filter our fields for which the usage is INP only By default this value is set to Y Yes Function Keys F21 Print list Presents a window allowing you to specify a From and To field names to print a report of the information shown on the display Special values FIRST and LAST may be used in the From To prompts The To field name prompt also recognizes an asterisk in the last position as a request to print the report through all items beginning with the specified characters The report is created with the following spool file attributes Spoo
147. eld name that you enter If you select CT Docu Mint will search the field name using the search criteria from the start column to the end of the line Start Column Enter the column at which to begin selecting the field name See the comments above for the importance of the start column in using EQ vs CT Search Criteria On this line you can enter one or more field names to be located These must be enclosed in single quotes with one space between multiple entries The search criteria is case sensitive If you specify EQ as the relationship Docu Mint evaluates each line of code beginning with the column specified for the number of characters of each of the field names entered If you specify CT as the relationship Docu Mint evaluates each line of code beginning at the start column and to the end of the line for each of the field names entered Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 169 QNAME Selection Qualified Select Omit Rule QNAME select omit rule allows you to explicitly select or omit certain fields from the selection The most common usage for this selection is to omit unwanted fields that have been selected by other rules The first step to refining the results of your selections is to define OMIT rules to exclude certain types of fields For example if a ATR rule yields a group of Customer Number fields when you re looking for dates you could define a NAME rule to exclude all fields where the name inclu
148. eral trademarks IBM IBM i and OS 400 are trademarks of International Business Machines All other trademarks are acknowledged as the properties of their respective owners Printed in Canada Second Printing Print PDF amp HTML January 21 2011 Table of Contents Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION amp INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ccccceccccccvceccevceecsesceeees 11 What is Docu Mint 2 ic 02 i020 05 o ebesae cuace toe beseb ee eadd bebe tates 11 About this Manual oss eree eed sede g dee e ote vod Seow oe ven eee nee events 12 How to Use this Manual 2 0 ccc cee ene nen reee 13 Installing or Upgrading to Docu Mint V6R5M0 6 eee eee eee 14 Installation Instructions 2 0 cece erreur rnern rarere 15 Getting Started with Docu Mint 00 c ccc cee ences 17 Sample Docu Mint Tasks 0 0 0 cece ccc eeeeneenee ene e ence nae 20 Docu Mint Common Function Keys 0 cece cece eee eee eee 22 Docu Mint Terminology 0 cece eee rererere rrer 23 Chapter 2 THE QUICK START EXERCISE ccecccccccccaccacccnccvcevcescsesceecsesseeeseesees 25 Quick Start Exercise eeo ea e ONS a ee EER Roe eta he SEE SOI 26 Chapter 3 WORKING WITH SYSTEM LIBRARIES ccccccccccccccscccvcevcevcsscsessesseseees 45 Work with System Libraries 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee ee 46 Using the WWL Panelning onee oR E sees Headey eRe eek ees 47 Library Information Displayed 00 c cee eee ae 47 Explan
149. ere the source member used to compile the program has been changed more recently than the program object This may indicate an out of date program object that needs to be recompiled NO will omit this comparison Program objects to print Type ALL to print all objects processed by the command Type ERR to print only those objects that have failed one or more of the comparisons described above Batch job description Type the name of the job description referenced on the submit job command This will identify the job queue that the process is submitted to Type NONE if you want to run this process interactively 214 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference DBFFLDXREF Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values FILE 1 to 10 sets of files for cross referencing File name GENERIC ALL FIELD 1 to 10 sets of field names Field name GENERIC ALL JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Database File Field Cross Reference command produces a report of field definitions within externally described files The report will list for all field names requested in the files specified a cross reference list of the fields and all files containing each field The Database File Field Cross Reference report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 2 from Docu Mint menu DM FLD Menu DM FLD can be reached by selecting option 3 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command DBFFLDXREF from a command lin
150. es are to be associated or attached to the PGM analysis Enabling the selection of one or more file analyses gives you the ability to analyze programs which may reference files in multiple libraries Determine the PGM analysis rules A subset of rules can be added to be used when analyzing programs to select non file fields which match properties such as field attributes name and constant values Also select internally defined fields or constants which match rules established for the PGM analysis The programs are then analyzed by documenting source code which references fields already identified by the FILE analysis and or determined by the PGM rules Source code specifications are listed and a drill down drill up functionality is available to help you determine which source code specifications need to be changed Finally generate impact analysis summaries and detail reports and print the worksheet necessary for the programmer to begin making source code changes The following sections of this chapter describe in detail the extended field analysis functions available in Docu Mint 156 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions The Work with Extended Field and Program Analysis Panel To access the Extended Field Analysis functions type option 20 at either the Docu Mint Main Menu or the Field Cross Reference Menu DM FLD Below is an illustration of the panel presented to work with extended field and program analyses
151. ess F10 Additional Parameters and confirm the option to Include extended field xref is set to YES the default 2 FILE Analysis Begin by building a FILE analysis as follows a Identify the file s to be analyzed You can analyze generic groups of files or all the files in a selected library a Build your FILE analysis rules These rules are used to select fields from the files you have specified Analysis rules provide the ability to select file fields using several field properties such as the attributes name text column headings and editing You can also build additional rules to omit certain fields that you may initially included Then execute the analysis a Review the FILE analysis results and eliminate unwanted fields by refining your selection rules and or creating new rules to explicitly or implicitly omit fields If necessary run the analysis again Further refine your results by explicitly omitting individual unwanted fields Generate reports to determine what rules were applied to select omit fields and to determine which file fields will need to be changed Initial program impact analysis reports indicate which programs are affected by the changes 3 PGM Analysis Generally you will build a PGM analysis after first creating one or more FILE analyses Qa Identify the program s that reference and use the files and fields selected by your FILE analysis Determine which FILE analysis entri
152. everal additional parameters In this instance the command is simply executed and no prompt is presented To prompt a command begin the string and any necessary parms with a question mark If you want the user to be able to change a parm add two question marks to the beginning of the string Here is an example showing both variations RNMM FILE amp L amp F MBR amp N NEWMBR amp N 82 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects SECTION Menu Reference In this Section Chapter 5 Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis Chapter 6 Menu DM 0BJ Object Cross Reference Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference Chapter 8 Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration Chapter 10 Menu DM ANZ Object Documentation Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis Option 1 from the Docu Mint Main Menu presents the menu DM LIB where the most important available options are those related to the cycle of marking and analyzing libraries and then checking for analysis errors This is the process to follow each time you need to extract information from a new library This menu also provides access to some additional options related to refreshing the library information Docu Mint stores in its internal files Here is an illustration of the menu DM4LIB ifm 270 Screen Shots Session tsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal 4 q SfE xi File Edit Connection Setup Script Wi
153. ew and work with a list of all the objects included in an analyzed library The WWO panel is described in detail in the next chapter 2 Change lib Use option 2 to prompt the system command CHGLIB which permits you to change a library type and description 3 Copy The copy option prompts the system command CPYLIB to copy a library 4 Delete The delete option will remove the library from your system BE AWARE AT ALL TIMES that the options available from the WWL panel are not just Docu Mint specific As we have mentioned already some of the available options are system commands many of which are very powerful The delete option is a case in point Make sure that all your Docu Mint users are aware of what this actually does it physically deletes the library from your system and not just from some internal Docu Mint file gt 5 Display details Use option 5 to display a detailed breakdown of the objects included in the library by object type The panel presented is described in the section Displaying Library Details on page 57 48 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects 6 Start Lib Anz Option 6 prompts the Docu Mint STRLIBANZ command to analyze a library In order to analyze a library you first need to mark it for an appropriate action i e LOAD or REMOVE For further details please refer to the section STRLIBANZ Command on page 238 of the Command Reference section 7 Rename Option 7 prompts the system comman
154. f Details CLRPGHXREF Type choices press Enter Library Pgm Fld Xref to clear Library name xALL Reorganize XRef File YES NO xYES Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Library a c 2 ee eee Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 KO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 5 6 Type a library name for which you want to clear the extended field analysis internal records When doing this you will normally want to specify YES for the RGZPFM parm in order to reclaim the space freed up by the purged records Chapter 5 Menu DM LIB Library Selection and Analysis 91 Option 11 Refresh Library Control File The Refresh Library Control command is used to maintain Docu Mint s library control file to insure all libraries on your system are in the control file to be later displayed by the Work with System Libraries panel Use this command to load the library control file initially and again as required to refresh update the records in this file Option 12 Refresh Library Object Count The Refresh Library Counts command is used to maintain Docu Mint s library control file DLIBCP to quickly update the count of the number of objects in a library to be displayed by the Work with System Libraries panel 92 Section Ill Menu Reference Menu DM OBJ Object Cros
155. f the origin of the field and at the far right the list includes any text associated with the field in the program or file and a summary of the usage Explanation of Options Program Library Field Use these fields to position the list of fields Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 183 Show 7 8 9 Records only In the upper right of the panel is an option that allows you turn on a filter to display only records that affect or are affected by other fields or have printer file or display references Type Y Yes for this option to turn on the filter blank the space out to turn it off Filter Inp Usage This option allows you filter out all records which have a usage of Inp Input only Type Y Yes into this option to activate the filter 4 0mit Select Normally when you build the rules for a Select you will include criteria that is more general than you absolutely need For example if you were searching for date fields in your programs you might include a Select for all fields with the attributes 6 0 N This will probably result in the selection of many fields that arent dates To omit these fields select an option 4 next to them This option removes the field from the selected field list and adds the field to the list of omitted fields for the analysis by building an explicit QNAME omit rule for the field The QNAME rule will ensure that this field is omitted should the analysis be executed again If you mistaken
156. f the panel presented ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu H int Subset Hork with Where Used WHUF 17 01 Type choices press Enter Child object GN HLP xALL name gener icx Child object type PGM xALL type Maximum explosion level 76 NOMAX number F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Change defaults r gt 5 37 5 3K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 8 The values initially presented reflect those selected the last time the command was executed Function Keys F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information 104 Section III Menu Reference Using the Change Session Defaults Display The Change Session Defaults panel allows you to make changes to the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the main where used list With the exception of the Screen size each prompt on this panel corresponds to a parameter of the WRKWHRUSE command For a complete description of the WWU command parameters please refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 This is the Change Session Defaults panel for the WWU command ifm 2129 Session 4 1sf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal
157. ference Menu DM ANZ Object Documentation Select option 30 from the Docu Mint Main Menu to present the Object Documentation Menu You can also get to this menu by pressing F19 Docobj Menu from the Work with System Libraries panel These options are used to update the internal cross reference files that Docu Mint uses to generate the lists and reports They do not produce any output themselves Use these when options when only a few objects in a library have been changed and you want to update the internal records pertaining to just those objects without running a full library analysis Below is an illustration of the menu DM ANZ in 270 Screen Shots Session ssf Reflection IBM 5250 Temin Tal File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM ANZ Business Computer Design V6ROMO Object Documentation Menu 1 Document Objects DOCOBJ 10 Document Commands DOCCMD 11 Document Files DOCFILE 12 Document Menus DOCMENU 13 Document Programs DOCPGM 14 Document Procedures DOCPROC 15 Document Queries DOCaRY 16 Document User Profiles DOCUSRPRF 17 Document ILE RPG Modules DOCMODULE 18 Document ILE Service programs DOCSRYPGM 20 File Documentation Menu DM F ILE 21 Menu Documentation Menu DM MENU 22 Program Documentation Menu DM PGM 90 Sign Off Selection or command F3 Exit Fo Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 Bb 21 7
158. fferent terms in its commands and output Below is a list of so Object Types me of those terms and their significance Docu Mint uses three additional pseudo object types in order to treat procedures source members and unknown object types as objects on your system Pseudo Object Type Description PROC Procedure SRCM Source member VAR Variable object type This value is used to define an object whose type is not determined until program execution A common example where this object type would be generated would be a statement within a CL program where a command uses a variable to define an object s type for example DSPOBJD OBJ MYLIB ANYOBJ OBJTYPE amp objtype Object Usage Normally object usage is described by the name of the command or procedure operating on a give used Docu Mint u n object In order to better describe how an object is being ses the following additional descriptions Object Usage Code Description CPP Command processing program Indicates an indirect call to the program by a command VCP Validity checking program Indicates an indirect call to the program by a command REF Referenced Indicates the file is used to define an externally described data structure in an RPG program INLMENU Initial menu Indicates an indirect display of the menu by a user profile Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions 23 Object Usage Code Description INLPGM Initial p
159. field cross reference report over the demo library DM DEMOLIB iam 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Spooled File ile 2 a OSYSPRT Page Line 1 2 Control Columns 1 130 Find i iaa E LOTEN MEUT E OE E E AEE R AEN SEA E EER TAA EEE ATER ARE E EE ETE E AANE AEE TEE locu Hint VER OHO Business Conputer Design 2001 10 26 11 47 21 Page 1 Progran Field Cross Reference Requested files DN DEHOLIB ALL lequested source USRPRF DH DEHOL IB File OM DENOLIB COHPHST Buffer Field Frt Fld Attr Fron To Usage COHPHST HCO P 3 0 1 2 DH DENOLIB DOORDH ON OEHOL 1B DHCHPK UPD ADD DH DEHOL 1B 0HCOHP UPD ADD DH DEHOL 1B DHCUST HCONAL 4 3 42 DH DENOL1B DD0ROH DH DEHOL 1B DHCHPK DH DEHOL 18 0HCOHP DH DEHOL 1B DHCUST HCADL1 30 43 72 DH DENOLIB DDORDH ON OENOL 1B DHCHPK DH DEHOL 1B OHCOMP DH DEHOL 1B DHCUST HCADL2 30 73 102 OMMDENOLIB DDORDH ONDENOL1B DHCHPK DMSOENOL 18 0HCOHP DH DEHOL 1B DHCUST HCCITY 15 103 117 DH DEHOL1B DDORDH DH DEHOL 1B DHCHPK DH DENOL 1B 0HCONP Hore F3 Enit Fl Cancel FigsLeft Fel Right F24etore keys Record requested before first record of file EB 3 22 3 22 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 7 3 Explanation of Panel In the sample above we are showing the top of the report with the entries for the file COMPMST showing The details include a list of
160. following fields JOBDAT INTERNAL INT 62 00 C Z ADDJOBDAT CPACDT ULACDT CD ULGF 6 0 P ACTIVITY DATE s affected or modified by the following fields JOBDAT INTERNAL INT 99 00 C Z ADDJOBDAT ULACDT s affected or modified by the following fields 100 0001 LITERAL INT 57 00 C MULT 100 0001 CPACDT YMD gt MDY s used in the following display printer formats CM LGIFM CMLIB SUB CPACDT CD CMPF 6 0 P ACTIVITY DATE s affected or modified by the following fields 100 0001 LITERAL INT 57 00 C MULT 100 0001 CPACDT YMD gt MDY s used in the following display printer formats CM LGIFM CMLIB SUB Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports 203 Analysis select omit rules listing DM 306 Use this option to print a report of all the Select Omit rules defined in an analysis 10 29 97 16 00 40 Rule Detail Listing 1 Analysis 1 PGM Analyze files in LG LIB Objects Analyzed ALL LG LIB Sequence PropertyRel Rule Details 1 SEL ATR EQ 6 0 N 2 SEL COLHDG CT 1 date Date DATE YYMM MMDD 3 SEL EDTCDE EQ Y 4 SEL EDTWRD CT 5 SEL TEXT CT 1 Date Dt dt Dat dat 6 OMIT TEXT CT 1 Number number client Client 7 OMIT TYPE EQ A 8 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG CALD CDDWNU 9 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG CLD2 CDDWNU 0 OMIT QNAME EQ LG B LG COMF CCCLNU 1 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKF TMUPID 2 OMIT QNAME EQ LG LIB LG TSKL1 TMUPID 3 OMIT QNAME EQ
161. g Alternate Source Definition Records To update records in the alternate source definitions file you first need to place the program into UPDATE mode by pressing F10 Update mode From this display you may change delete or display the existing alternate source definition file records by placing the appropriate option next to the record in the Opt column and pressing Enter Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration 139 Option 12 Maintain Alternate ILE Module Object Library Reference File When program objects are created the may contain bound modules The modules are in fact the objects that contain all the pertinent information indicating the source file and member info etc that is necessary to perform source code analysis If the MODULE objects have been moved to a library other than what is specified in the program object the alternate module library will direct the analysis process where to find the module You can add alternate ILE module object libs by selecting option 12 from the menu DM CFG option 5 from the Docu Mint Main Menu When you do this a panel similar to this one is presented IM 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E 5 xj File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Alt ILE module object libs Type the ILE module object library as retrieved from PGM and SRVPGM objects and the alternate library to locate the module during analysis 4 Delete Search IL
162. g the selected records belonging to the specified library You must specify YES if you want to take advantage of the disk space savings produced by removing the selected records from the file Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 211 CMPPGMDBF Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values PGMNAM Program name amp lib to be analyzed Pgm Name Generic or ALL DBFLIB Library containing database files to Lib Name or to enter multiple compare to PRTALL Print a listing of all programs or only ALL ERR errors JOBD Batch job description Job description name NONE When preparing software for distribution or moving programs into production it may be necessary to ensure that each program has been compiled over data base files contained in the production library or libraries The CMPPGMDBF command will compare the file libraries referenced in a program object with one or more libraries defined in the command The comparison will highlight any programs that have been compiled using files other than those specified on the command This command does not require the program object library to be analyzed You can run the CMPPGMDBF command directly from a command line or by selection option 18 from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel Command Parameters Program name and library Enter the program name and library to be analyzed by this command You can process multiple programs using a generic name or all programs in th
163. ge Docu Mint Defaults CHGDOCDFT command The source file library and member used to create the object To create a new option control record enter the Option Item type and Item attribute values in the list display and press F6 Create Remember to right justify the Option before pressing F6 After your press F6 Docu Mint presents the display described in the next section below allowing you to enter the required information Working with Option Control Records When you select option 13 then press F6 to create a new option or select option 2 to modify an existing one the panel presented is similar to this one ifm 270 Screen Shots Session tsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal 3 Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help UPDATE Type information press Enter Option Item type Item attribute Group program Library Enter key command OPTION 2 Option Control Maintenance O x OPTCMN 2 MODULE RPGLE STRSEU SRCFILE amp SRCLIB amp F SRCMBR amp SRCMBR Prompt key F4 command STRSEU SRCFILE amp srclib amp f SRCMBR amp src mbr OPTION 2 Roll up down F3 Exit Fo Refresh Fii Delete Fie Cancel B 5 40 5 40 Ho IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 9 9 142 Section Ill Menu Reference tens F Option Control File Fields Below are descriptions of fields defined in the Docu Mint s Option Control File DOPTCP and used in the Opt
164. gement file CM WMSEM CMLIB Work With Messages Display File 202 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Program Display file change requirements work sheet FLDTOFLD This option allows you to create a detailed report of all the programs and display files impacted by the fields in your analysis When you use this option to generate the report it initially defaults to printing a summary report 11 03 97 8 38 29 Program Change Requirements Work Sheet Page 1 From program CMLIB ALL To program CMLIB ALL Process 3 PGM CM programs in CMLIB Analysis date 2007 10 31_14 07 22 Program CM CMS Convert DSPMSGD outfile to dbf CD MSGF Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM CMS Field File Field File Orign_Src_Seq Source Code Direct_field_references MFCHGD CD MSGF 6 0 P Change date Is affected or modified by the following fields CHGDAT INTERNAL INT 124 00 C MOVELCHGDAT MFCHGD MFCRTD CD MSGF 6 0 P Create date Is affected or modified by the following fields CRTDAT INTERNAL INT 123 00 C MOVELCRTDAT MFCRTD Program CM LDT Log detailed source changes to CM ULDF Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM LDT UDACDT CD ULDF 6 0 P Date saved Is affected or modified by the following fields UDATE INTERNAL INT 48 00 C UDATE MULT 10000 01 UDACDT 60 10000 01 LITERAL INT 48 00 C UDATE MULT 10000 01 UDACDT 60 Program CM LED Log Edit STRSEU stuff Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM LED CPACDT CD CMPF 6 0 P ACTIVITY DATE s affected or modified by the
165. hange Docu Mint defaults Presents a display which allows you to select the default values for certain operations in Docu Mint For additional information on the changing Docu Mint defaults refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 73 The Work with Where Used Command This is another option you will commonly execute from the Work with Analyzed Objects panel The Work with Where Used WWU option allows you to present a list interface for locating where objects are used on your system From this list you can perform operations such as copy delete edit and rename When you select the Work with Where Used option the panel below is presented ifm 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal a E x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Where Used HRKHHRUSE Type choices press Enter Child object gt DDORDD PRY ALL name generic Child object type gt PGM PRY ALL ANY type Library list PRY ALL PRV JOB name Indent pattern PRV PRY pattern Columns to indent xPRY PRV 1 2 3 Output 2 ee eee PRINT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel Fi3 How to use this display F24 More keys Ei gt 5 37 5 37 po IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM Figure 4 6 The only required command parameters are the child object and object type
166. hem with a separator character and indenting any statements within the structured code Option 6 Format ILE RPG Source Member The option to format an ILE RPG source member is used to enhance ILE source code Typically you will do this with source code that has recently been converted to ILE using IBM s CVTRPGSRC command When you run DOCILESRC over an ILE source member the following changes are made a Field definitions are consolidated into D Specs a Comment lines are converted to high intensity a JFand DO structures are documented INDRPGSRC INDCLSRC and DOCILESRC can also be run from the menu DM UTL and are described and illustrated in Chapter 8 Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities Option 7 Program Explosion Report The Program Explosion Report command produces two reference reports The first report explodes the source of selected CL and RPG programs showing program calls The second report is a directory to the first report giving an alphabetical list of programs and the page of the first report that the program may be found on 150 Section Ill Menu Reference Program Explosion Inquiry The PGMEXPINQ command option 8 from menu DM PGM allows you to view a list of programs called by a selected RPG 400 or ILE RPG program At the command prompt enter the object name and library and the object type PGM MODULE Then press Enter Below is an illustration of the output from this command with module GN G01
167. hen subject to the omit rules If one omit rule is satisfied the record will be flagged as omitted 2 Ifa limited number of fields are incorrectly selected you can explicitly omit a field using option 4 Omit field by working with the with the analysis results By explicitly omitting fields the field is added to the list of omitted fields and a QNAME omission rule is automatically created to ensure that the field is omitted should the analysis be executed again This technique is generally preferable if you have already narrowed the list of fields selected by refining the select omit rules Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 173 When you take option 9 next to a completed FILE analysis the panel presented is similar to the one shown below 2 21302 Jot x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith SELECTED Field Entries Analysis 2 2 et 1 xFILE Analyze files in LG LIB Process selection LG LIB ALL FRO cee eee ee Field name File attributes ALL ALL PF LF Type options press Enter 4 0mit field 5 Display 6 Print results 7 Hhere used 8 Rule info Opt File name Field Lngth De Tp Text _ LG CAL CLCLDT 6 2P Date Selected _ LG CALD CDLODT 6 P Date Selected _ LG CALN CNLODT 6 P Date Selected _ LG CALP CPLODT 6 P Date Selected _ LG CAL1 CLCLDT 6 P Date Selected _ LG CLD2 CDLODT 6 P Date Selected _ LG CSTF LDLODT 6 P Log Date _ LG DETF LDLCDT 6 P Log Close Date
168. her you want to delete internal master file records for libraries that are not found in subsequent analyses Refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference for a complete explanation of each parameter When you run the CHGLIBATR command a panel similar to this one is presented ifm 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E l x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Change Library Attributes CHGLIBATR Type choices press Enter Library i u wo wee ee gt DM DEMOL IB Name Group 2 ee ee ee SAME Name SAME NONE Delete old obj master records SAME SAME NO YES Action at next analysis SAME SAME LOAD REMOVE NONE Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel Fi3 How to use this display F24 More keys B gt 5 37 5 37 Ao IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 9 3 Enter a library name for which to change the Docu Mint settings and your choices then press Enter Setting up Library Groups When you run the STRLIBANZ command to analyze a library one of the options available is to enter a library group name instead of a single lib This allows you to simultaneously analyze a specific set of libraries rather than having to submit separate jobs for each one In order to create a group of libraries all you need to do is run the CHGLIBATR command for each of the libraries and ensure that you specify the same group name L
169. hings to take a look at u Press F2 to go to the Docu Mint Main Menu From this menu you have access to all the tools and commands in the software In this Quick Start exercise we will allude to some of the most useful options available from this menu Press F3 to get back to the WWL screen a Back at the WWL select option 5 next to any library to display the object count details From this panel you can see a summary of the number of objects of different types available in the library and work with those objects using PDM Press F3 to get back to the WWL screen a Lastly select option 14 next to any of your libraries This prompts the CHGLIBATR command which is a useful way to group together Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 27 related libraries so you can analyze them all at once To do this just type a group name for the lib and press Enter You can also press F6 from the WWL screen to work with your existing library groups By now your library analysis should be complete or close to it Press F5 from the WWL screen to verify if the ACTIVE message has disappeared and the Last Anz date and time fields populated You can also display your messages pspmsc to verify that the job has finished running among your last message should be one indicating that the analysis completed normally Our next step is to check the library analysis error report to see if there were any analysis problems To do this ioj F
170. ibrary Lists on page 134 F5 Refresh Changes the prompts back to their original values and redisplays the screen F6 Edit Presents a display that allows you to modify the library list used by WWU when resolving object libraries A value of USRDEN User defined denotes a unique combination of libraries not represented by a named library list For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display above for further information F18 Change Docu Mint defaults Presents a display which allows you to select the default values for certain operations in Docu Mint For additional information on the changing Docu Mint defaults refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 106 Section IIl Menu Reference Option 4 Orphaned Objects Report The Orphaned Objects Report is a listing of source and object discrepancies An orphaned object is an object on your system for which the corresponding source member used to create the object has been deleted or moved from the source file where the object was originally created For example information retrieved for program ORDENT in library PRODOB indicates that source member ORDENT in file of QRPGSRC in library TESTSRC was used to create the object If the member ORDEN
171. ibrary groups can also be maintained from the Work with Library Groups panel which you can get to by pressing F6 from the Work with System Libraries screen Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration 133 Option 3 Work with Library Lists The Work with Library Lists command provides you with a list interface to named library lists Library lists are used by the Work with Used Objects command WRKUSEOBJ or WUO to restrict the scope of your results Each named library list consists of the following a A name and description u A current library and up to 15 system libraries a Upto25 user libraries When you run the WRKLIBL command a panel similar to this one is presented if 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Computer Design WLLDS3 01 Hork with Library Lists Position to Type options press Enter 2 Edit 3 Copy 4Delete 5 Display 7 Rename Opt List Text ACCOUNT Libraries for Accounting Appl ication SHIP Library List for Shipping Appl ication Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F9 Command entry F12 Cancel F21 Print list C Copyright BCD 1982 1998 K gt 10 2 10 2 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Figure 9 4 Explanation of Panel This screen shows a list of any library lists that have been defined and their text descriptions From this display you can create edit copy delete displ
172. ies for this parameter are LOAD REMOVE or NONE Unmark the library The default value is LOAD RMVLVL Specifies to what level records are to be removed from the cross reference files during an ACTION REMOVE A value of XREF will remove object cross reference records but leave the object master record in file DOBJMP A value of ALL will remove both cross reference records and the object master record removing all traces of the object from Docu Mint files The default value is XREF PGMEXPINQ Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values OBJNAM Object name Object name OBJLIB Object library Library name LIBL OBJTYPE Object type PGM MODULE This command allows you to view a list of programs called by a selected RPG 400 or ILE RPG program You can run this command directly from a command line or select option 8 from the DM PGM menu At the command prompt enter the object name library and type PGM MODULE and press Enter The DM PGM menu and the panels presented by the PGMEXPINQ command are described in detail in Option 22 Menu DM PGM Program Documentation on page 149 Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 225 PGMFLDXREF Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values FILE 1 10 sets of files to include in report File name GENERIC ALL LIBL USRLIBL ALLUSR RPGSRCF 1 10 RPG source files to analyze for file Library name LIBL usage JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job desc
173. ile Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help select option 10 Display Library Analysis Errors next to the Object Name 2 2 ee we oe n Object Library DM DEMOLIB ALL Name library Object Type se s noian sewa Display Objects in Error Only E we Y Yes N No DM DEMOLIB 6 Add alternate source reference 7 Add Alt ILE module object library Source Source Source The panel Opt Object Library Type attr Member File Library ErrId _ DDORDD DMHDEMOLIB PGM RPGLE DDORDD QRPGLESRC DMHDEMOLIB CPF4i02 resented _ DMCSTC DM DEMOLIB PGM CLP DMCSTC QcLsrc DMHDEMOLIB CPF4102 P _ DMORDC DM DEMOLIB PGM CLP DMORDC QCLSRC DM DEMOLIB CPF4102 hi uld b _ DMORDF DM DEMOLIB PGM RPGLE DMORDF QRPGLESRC DM DEMOLIB CPF4102 sho e DMORDL DM DEMOLIB PGM RPGLE DMORDL QRPGLESRC DM DEMOLIB CPF4i02 similar to the one shown at right 5 Fii Dsp err msg txt F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel Bottom This panel Fei Prt anz err rpt displays a list of sprays SLO 3 gt 3 40 the objects that 340 KF IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Docu Mint wasn t able to fully analyze your list may vary slightly Though there are a wide variety of reasons why you may get analysis errors the most common cause is that the object source wasn t found where the object expected it to be generate as much cross reference information as possible you won t be left PA Even though Docu Mint may not find the source for an object it will still is J with absolutely no results
174. ile is QSYSPRT and the User Data is PgmFldXref it should be about 15 pages Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 33 Select an option BEgeeeeenererme ro aio Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help 5 Display next Display Spooled File Files OSYSPRT Page Line 1 2 to this report Colums 1 130 The first page tp Should be Cc sesyen uenee aa e eia iae t aa similar to the Peqwested soree USRPRF BMMBEtOLIB File D DENOLIB CONPHST one shown at Buffer Field 7 Frt Fld Attr Fron To Usage ri ght RCOHPNST NOs P3 0 1 2 DNSDENOLIB DOORDH DHSDENOLIB DHCHPK UPD ADD DHSDENOL 1B DHCONP UPO ADD DSDENOLTB DHCUST NOM 40 3 42 ONOENOLIB ODOROH ONSOENOLTB DNCIPK me 18 DHCOHP At the left of the DSOENOLTB DHCUST i MLI 30 43 72 OROENOLIB ODOROH ONSOENOLIB DNCIPK onsen 18 0c0hP displ ay isa list OM ADEHOL I6 OHCUST MCAL 30 73 102 DNSDENOLIB DOORDH ONSDENOLTB DHCHPK DNSDENOL18 DHCOHP Ov SOE 1 OHCUST of fields in each MIY 15 103 117 OMAMENOLTR OOOROH ONSOENOLTB DNCIPK cme 18 DHCOHP tore file selected To F3 Enit F2 Cancel FI9sLeft F20 Right F24 Hfore keys the right of that Bo 322 are the field 3 22 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet attributes and finally a list of programs in which the fields appear and their usage in those programs Additional entries are displayed to the right with extra lines inserted where necessary Press F12 twice to return to the menu DM F
175. ill identify programs that are affected by the files which require a change In addition this analysis type identifies how the selected fields are used in these programs and indicates which lines of code are affected by the change to the file layout To do this when a PGM analysis is defined one or more FILE analyses records are associated with the PGM analysis It is necessary to allow more than one FILE analysis to be attached to a PGM analysis because a given program or application may reference files in one or more libraries When the programs are analyzed by Docu Mint the program file and field references are compared to the selected set of fields from each of the attached FILE analyses and if a match is found the program in question will require recompilation and may require changes to the source Changes to programs are further documented based on rules that are established for the PGM analysis For example if six digit date fields are being selected the PGM analysis results will include all data base fields selected by the FILE analyses attached and all internally defined numeric fields that have the attributes of 6 0 N The PGM analysis determines which programs are affected and also pinpoints the source code specifications which will likely require a change A PGM analysis can be done without attaching any FILE analysis records If this is done only the rules established for the PGM analysis are considered when selecting
176. ime fields which also satisfy this rule If this happens the time fields can be removed from your selection using one or a combination of the techniques below 1 Create an omit rule which will omit field text or column headings that contain the constant time A generic rule such as this will require that the analysis be executed again clearing the previous results and building a new set of results based on the revised rules After a field is selected it is then subject to the omit rules If one omit rule is satisfied the record will be flagged as omitted 2 Ifa limited number of fields are incorrectly selected they can be explicitly omitted using option 4 Omit field when working with the analysis results By explicitly omitting fields the field is added to the list of omitted fields and a QNAME type omission rule is automatically created to ensure that the field is omitted should the analysis be executed again This technique is generally preferable if you have already narrowed the list of fields selected by refining the select omit rules and a relatively small number of undesired fields still exist Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 163 Creating Select Field Properties To create new Select rules for a FILE analysis press F6 from the panel shown above Figure 11 3 When you do this the window below is presented Select Field Property Property 1 Select Opt Property Description AE Field at
177. ing option iw 270 Screen Shots Session tsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Tei File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Default Subfile Options Maintenance Type information press Enter Subfile option 2 Text description Change lib Description Change option Show on panel 1 eee u Y Yes N No Item type soa naien a CMD Item attribute Command string STRSEU SRCFILE amp SRCLIB amp SRCFIL SRCMBR amp SRCMBR OPTION 2 F4 Prompt Use the following tokens for substitution values amp N O0b ject Name amp srclib Source Library amp L 0bject Library amp srcmbr Source Member amp F Source File Roll up down F3sExit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fii Delete F1i2 Cancel LE gt 7 40 7 40 Ho IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 4 12 For DEFAULT options the option number and text descriptions cannot be changed Show on panel Type N if you want to hide this option from the WWL or WWO displays This option is useful if you want to show only a particular subset of options or if you want to hide the options you know you ll remember so you can display some of the more obscure ones on the default screen Item type attribute This is the object type selected and the additional attribute for example PF for physical files Command String The screen above shows an illustration of the command string to execute a STRSEU with s
178. ing Enter the WWU list display will be rebuilt based on the new selection criteria The list portion of this column displays the name of the object using the selected child object If the object name is not indented it is the child object selected Conversely an indented object name indicates a parent object that uses the given child Library The library in which the object resides This value is blank for all child objects Type Attr Use this field to change the child object type After changing this value and pressing Enter the WWU list display will be rebuilt based on the new selection criteria 102 Section IIl Menu Reference The list portion of this column displays the object type i e DTAARA PGM etc The object attribute such as CLP or RPG is appended to the type when possible Seq The source sequence number of the parent object at which the child is used Usage How the child object is used Normally object usage is described by the name of the command or procedure operating on a given object For an explanation of the special object usage descriptions defined by Docu Mint refer to object usage abbreviations in Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 Text A description of the object Child Displays the name of the child used in this particular reference Usually the child shown here is the same as the non indented child previously shown in the list A child name in this column that differs from the previous chi
179. inition of EXC Execute This allows you to refer to different yet related actions by a single entry The following values may be entered for this parameter with ALL and EXC being the most useful entries Value Description ALC Object allocation ALL All generic usage definitions DCLF File declarations DLC Object deallocation DLT Object deletion EXC Execute MGT Object management operations OPR Object operational operations OVR Object overrides REF File references DSPOBJTYPE Allows you to limit the child objects in the list to objects of one specific type This parameter will accept an OS 400 object type such as FILE the special pseudo type PROC for procedures or the special value ALL 244 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference DSPTYPALL The Display Object Type ALL parm controls whether or not program references to objects where the object type is specified as ALL such as DSPOBJD OBJ L X OBJTYPE ALL should be included in the list This parameter accepts a value of NO or YES with the suggested default being NO DSPTYPVAR The Display Object Type VAR parm controls whether or not program references to objects whose object type is determined at run time by a program variable should be included in the list For example when analyzing the statement DSPOBJD OBJ MYLIB ANYOBJ OBUTYPE amp 0bjtype Docu Mint will create a cross reference usage record for object ANYOB in library MYLIB howe
180. ion Pn Command Abbrev _ 1 Wrk w anz objs Work w analyzed objs DEFAULT Y CALL PGM DMWHO PARM 2 Change lib Change option DEFAULT Y _ 3 Copy Copy object DEFAULT Y _ 4 Delete Delete object DEFAULT Y _ 5 Display detail Display library DEFAULT Y _ 6 Start lib anz Start library anz RUNCMD Y STRLIBANZ LIBGRP amp L _ 7 Rename Rename object DEFAULT Y _ 8 Mark lib LOAD Mark library LOAD RUNCMD Y MRKLIB LIB amp LB ACT _ 9 Mark lib RMV V Remove lib REMOVE RUNCMD Y MRKLIB LIB amp LB ACT 10 View print err View print err rpt RUNCMD Y CALL PGM DM 713 PARM 12 Work with obj Work with object DEFAULT Y _ 14 Chg lib attrs Change library atr RUNCMD Y CHGLIBATR LIB amp LB 15 Clr xref files Clear x ref files RUNCMD Y CLRPGMXREF LIBRARY More F3sExit F5 Refresh F6 Create F Func key defaults F1i2 Cancel E gt 9 2 32 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 4 10 The panel above displays the options available from the WWL panel when you first install Docu Mint Press F6 to create new options or use option 3 to copy an existing option to create a new one You can also use option 2 to change existing options and option 4 to delete them Option 5 displays some summary information about the option including the full attached command string The available options are of two types DEFAULT and RUNCMD The sections below describe how to modify each of the option type
181. ions 5 amp 6 Refresh Library Control Files The RSHLIBCNT and RSHLIBCTL commands are also accessible from the menu DM LIB and are documented in Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise as well as in Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Option 7 Format ILE RPG Source Member The option to format an ILE RPG source member is used to enhance ILE source code Typically you will do this with source code that has recently been converted to ILE using IBM s CVTRPGSRC command When you run DOCILESRC over an ILE source member the following changes are made a Field definitions are consolidated into D Specs a Comment lines are converted to high intensity u IFand DO structures are documented If you have any concerns about the changes made to your source member you can also select an option to copy the selected member before executing the changes Below is an illustration of the panel presented when you select this option ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Format ILE RPG Source Member DOCILESRC Type choices press Enter Source file QRPGLESRC Name Library io o d 2 eee ee gt KEVINH Name LIBL Source Member or ALL gt xALL Name ALL Copy member before conversion xYES VES NO Copy to source file QCPYLESRC Name Library 2 2 eee eee LIBL Name LIBL Copy w REPLACE to member name xFROMHBR Nam
182. ions Control File Maintenance Program Option This should be a one to three character right justified code identifying the option Item type Restricts the option to operating on items of this type only Special value OPT along with Item attribute DESC may be used to define a 20 character description entered in the Enter key command field of the option Special values PROC and SRCM may be used to define options operating on procedures and source members Item attribute Restricts the options to operating on items with this object attribute only such as CLP RPG LF PF Special value DESC along with Item type OPT may be used to define a 20 character description entered in the Enter key command field of the option Group program Not used at this time This field is defined for a future version of Docu Mint to provide for performing multiple option functions from a single display similar to PDM s Copy and Rename options Enter key command The command to perform when the Enter key is pressed from the list display or a 20 character description of the option s function To disable a valid option for a particular type or type attribute combination create a record for the option type attribute and leave the Enter key command field blank Prompt key F4 command The command to perform when F4 Prompt is pressed from the list display Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration 143 144 Section Ill Menu Re
183. ionship Docu Mint evaluates each line of field text beginning with the column specified for the number of characters of each of the search entries If you specify CT as the relationship Docu Mint evaluates each line of field text beginning at the start column and to the end of the line for each of the search entries Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 171 TYPE Selection Field Type The last class of rule that you can define for FILE Selects is TYPE This select allows you to define a rule that selects all fields of a specific type The panel presented for defining this class of rule is similar to this one 21302 OL x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork With Rule Detail Field Attribute or Type Select Omit Rule Analysis 4 Initial analysis of programs in GN LIB Property TYPE Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 237 Relationship xEQ Type information press Enter Field type i Valid DDS field type or N for all Numeric F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cance 13 25 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO06S4 13 25 ki 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM gt Figure 11 11 Explanation of Panel Field Type Enter a field type to search for In this case we have specified a search for all L type fields You can specify any valid DDS field type or N for all numeric fields 172 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Working with
184. is panel will initially display those records in update mode ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal 3 10j x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Mode UPDATE Alternate Source File Maintenance ALTSMN 1 Compiled from source file Compiled from source library Search sequence number 0 Type options press Enter 2 Change 4 De lete 5 Display Compiled From Source Search Look In Source Opt File Library Sequ File Library QCLSRC DM DEMOL IB 0 QCLSRC2 DM DEMOL IB QCLSRC LUBY 0 QCLSRC KEVINH _ QRPGLESRC DM DEMOLIB 0 QRGPLESRC2 DM DEMOLIB _ QRPGLESRC_ LUBY 0 QRPGLESRC_ KEVINH _ QRPGSRC LUBY 0 QRPGSRC KEVINH Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add mode Fid Update mode B gt 12 3 123 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 9 7 Explanation of Panel Adding Alternate Source Definition Records To add records to the alternate source definitions file you first need to place the program into ADD mode by pressing F6 Add mode Blank records are presented in the list portion of the screen allowing you to enter up to 10 alternate source definition records at a time After entering the data press Enter to accept the records Docu Mint will issue a message informing you that the records were processed successfully Continue by entering more records or pressing F10 Update mode to work with existing alternate source definition records Updatin
185. is parameter is used in conjunction with the Indent pattern parameter This parameter accepts a value of 1 2 or 3 OUTPUT Specifies where the output from the command is sent Possible values are Display or PRINT Report For a complete description of the panels presented by the Work with Used Objects command and the options available from these please refer to Option 2 Work with Used Objects on page 94 246 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference WRKWHRUSE or WWU Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values OBJ Child object name Object name GENERIC ALL OBJTYPE Child object type ALL TYPE prompt for list of valid types LIBL Lib list to use when resolving obj name Named library list JOBD ALL INDPTN Character preceding indention Valid character usually COLUMNS Columns to indent 1 2 3 OUTPUT Where to send command output screen PRINT w The Work with Where Used WWU command provides you with a list interface to locate where objects are used on your system From this list you can perform operations such as copy delete edit and rename WWU performs these operations by calling commands with substitution values passed from the list of items you are working with for example library name object name object type An important feature of the Work with Where Used command is the ability to perform a where used on a physical file and automatically include references to all logical files buil
186. ith these reports you can either press F21 from the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel or select option 21 from the Docu Mint Main Menu When you do this Docu Mint presents a list of existing analyses for you to select from Then you are presented with a set of reports that you can select from dependent on whether select a FILE or PGM analysis The sections below describe each of the reports available FILE Analysis Reports When you select an analysis of type FILE Docu Mint presents a list of report options in a window similar to this one Extended Analysis Report Menu Analysis 1 F4 List FILE Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Sear Select item press Enter FILE Analysis Reporting Detail listing of selected omitted fields by file Summary listing of selected files File program impact analysis summary Analysis select omit rules listing F4 Select analysis Fi2 Cancel Figure 12 1 Explanation of Options 1 Detail listing of selected omitted fields by file When you select option 1 an additional prompt is presented at which you can specify a range of files to be included in the report The default range is to print all files included in the analysis This report prints a list of all fields included in the selected analysis You can optionally choose to not include fields that have been omitted For a sample of this report with an explanation of the output please refer to Section 12 A FILE Analysis Repor
187. itself the analysis process does rely on using the source to get a complete picture of the object usage on your system If Docu Mint doesn t find an object s source in the expected location as determined by a DSPPGM and there is no relevant alternate source file entry an analysis error is issued In the illustration above all the errors shown on the first page are CPF4102s which tell us that the source was not found In the library we have illustrated above this is acommon problem because it is our practice to create our source in the library LG SRC during development but move it into LG LIB when the 54 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects objects go into production However it generally isn t our practice to recompile the program once more after moving the source So when Docu Mint looks at the programs in LG LIB it expects to find source in LG SRC and not in LG LIB where the members currently reside When you see patterns like this in your analysis error reports you can address them by creating one or more alternate source reference rules Docu Mint then uses these rules during the analysis process to locate the missing source members To create an alternate source reference just select option 6 next to an error that is representative of the problem that you want to address Below is an illustration of the window presented when we do this 1g 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IB
188. ject name is not indented the object displayed represents a parent object and appears in the list because it matches the Object Library and Type Attr criteria you requested All parent objects are further identified by a Usage value of Parent Conversely an indented object name indicates a child object that is used by the executable object higher in the list Since only 6 spaces are allocated to indent an object name all levels beyond this limit will display a number to the left of the object name indicating the indent level the object resides at Library Use this field to change the parent object library name Chapter 6 Menu DM OBJ Object Cross Reference 95 The list portion displays the object library The library name value displayed is dependent upon the value of the Display library name parameter Press F14 Actual Resolved library names to toggle between showing the actual library name from Docu Mint s cross reference data base and the resolved library name Type Attr Use this field to change the parent object type The list portion displays the type of object such as DTAARA FILE PGM etc The attribute of the object such as CLP LF PF RPG is appended to the type if applicable Seq This represents the source sequence number of the program or procedure at which the object is used or the menu option number that initiates execution of the object Usage This column indicates how the object is used Normally
189. keys d Qverprinting not displayed this and other r aie B 3 22 oe reports as well IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet as more complex and relevant examples You have now completed the Docu Mint Quick Start As your next step we recommend that you mark and analyze a small set of your own libraries where you are familiar with the data and programs After completing the first analysis check for analysis errors using option 10 from the Work with System Libraries panel Once you have defined the necessary alternate source file reference options to clean up the irregularities in your libraries if any you can analyze them again and continue on to trying out the different reports Finally try creating an extended field analysis over your libraries and spend some time reviewing and adjusting your output and experimenting with the many options provided for this If you have any questions or problems at any time please contact BCD Tech Support by any of the means described in the Tech Support Guide included with your documentation 42 Section Installation and Tutorial SECTION Working With Libraries and Objects In this Section Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects Working with System Libraries Introduction and Overview Docu Mint uses an interface similar to PDM to allow you to analyze and work with your libraries and the objects they contain The first
190. know to have changed on your system For a detailed description of the menu DM ANZ please refer to Chapter 10 Menu DM ANZ Object Documentation F20 WRKLIBL The Work with Library Lists command allows you to customize the named library lists that you can use as parameters on a few different Docu Mint commands including the STRLIBANZ The next few sections of this chapter describe in more detail a number of the options available from the Work with System Libraries panel beginning with the tools for cleaning up analysis errors The Work with Analyzed Objects screen is addressed in the next chapter Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 53 Working with Analysis Errors After you mark and analyze a library or set of libraries the next critical step is to make sure that you didn t have any unexpected analysis errors Use option 10 from the Work with System Libraries screen to display and work with your analysis errors Below is an illustration of the panel presented sini File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Library Analysis Errors Object Name 2 Object Library LG LIB ALL Name Object Type Display Objects in Error Only Y Y Yes N No 6 Add alternate source reference 7 Add Alt ILE module object library Source Source Source Opt Object Library Type attr Member File Library ErriId LG L367 LG L IB PGM RPGLE LG L367 QRPGLESRC LG UPDLIB CPF4102 LG RO01 LG L IB P
191. ld name in the Object column indicates this Child is a logical file built over the physical file child shown in the Object column Library Displays the library name of the child used in this particular reference Function Keys F16 Position to Toggles between positioning the display to the top of the list and the bottom of the list F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display below for further information F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information F21 Print list Prints the current form of the list Chapter 6 Menu DM 0BJ Object Cross Reference 103 Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display The Subset Work with Where Used display allows you to make changes to the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the main where used list After making any changes and pressing Enter the list is rebuilt based on the new selection criteria Each prompt on this panel corresponds to a parameter of the WRKWHRUSE command You can reach the Subset Work with Where Used display by pressing F17 from either the main Where Used list or the Change Session Defaults display Below is an illustration o
192. led file FILE QSYSPRT User data USRDTA WrkPgmFld 120 Section Ill Menu Reference Option 20 Work with Extended Field Analysis Docu Mint s Extended Field Analysis features provide the functionality to analyze and identify specific file fields determine what programs reference and use these file fields and document the programs which will require changes The extended field analysis utilizes the file and program information derived from the Docu Mint library analysis The panels and functions presented when you select this option are described in Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 121 122 Section Ill Menu Reference Menu DM UTL Docu Mint Utilities The Docu Mint utilities include options to configure the software update the internal files and format your source members To work with the Docu Mint utilities select option 4 from the Docu Mint Main Menu or press F16 Utility Menu from the Work with System Libraries panel Option 4 presents menu DM UTL illustrated below ioxi File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM UTL Business Computer Design V6ROMO Docu Mint Utilities Menu DEMO 1 Scan Source SCN 2 Indent CL Source INDCLSRC 3 Indent RPG Source INDRPGSRC 4 Edit Local Data Area LDA 5 Refresh Library Counts RSHLIBCNT 6 Refresh the Library Control File RSHLIBCTL 7 Format ILE RPG Source Member DOCILESRC 90 Sign Off Sele
193. ling options provide the following enhanced capabilities a Three character option codes allow for IBM like mnemonics in describing the function being performed CPY CRT DLT EDT etc a Options are object type and attribute sensitive allowing for different yet similar commands to be executed for the same option For example option 5 Display will execute DSPCMD if the list item is a command and DSPDTAARA if the list item is a data area This object type attribute structure also allows the command being executed to be determined in a hierarchical manner as follows A check is first made for a record whose option type and attribute match that of the requesting option type and attribute If a match is found the command defined on this record is used Next a check is made for a record whose option and type match that of the requesting option and type and whose attribute key field is blank Finally a check is made for a record with the requested option whose type and attribute key fields are blank Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration 141 u In addition to providing support to PDM substitution variables amp N amp L amp T etc Docu Mint also recognizes the following additional substitution variables Substitution Variable Description amp dftfil amp dftlib amp srcfil amp srclib amp srcmbr Creating Option Control Records The default Docu Mint source file and library defined by the Chan
194. lt get very large and occupy a significant amount of storage space If you do not plan on using the Extended Field Analysis Module this parameter can be changed to NO for the library analysis JOBD Specify the name of the job description to submit the job under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRE The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the value NONE is not advised WRKANZCMD Command Work with Analyzed Commands allows you to maintain the list of commands that are included in CL program analysis The panel presented displays a list of records in the file DCMDCF which is used by the ANZCLP command as the 240 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference basis for analyzing your CL programs Below is an illustration of the panel presented when you run WRKANZCMD ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal iol x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith Supported Commands Type information press Enter 4 Delete Parm Parameter Object Default Gener ic Opt Command Pos Keyword Type Value Usage _ CRIPF 1 FILE FILE CURLIB CRT DCL 1 VAR Internal _ DCL 2 IWE Internal _ DCL 3 LEN Internal _ DCLF 1 FILE xFILE xLIBL x OPR _ DLCOBJ _1 OBJ Internal _ LIBL DLC _ DLTDTAARA 1 DTAARA DTAARA LIBL DLT _ DLTDTAQ 1 DTAQ xDTAQ
195. luates it s internal records for the selected file and checks each field for the specified edit code s Start Column When using EDTCDE Select rules the start column should always be 1 Search Criteria On this line you can enter one or more edit codes to be located Edit code entries must be enclosed in single quotes with one space between multiple entries Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 167 EDTWRD Selection Edit Word When you build a rule of type EDTWRD Docu Mint scans the field edit word entries for the specified values The panel presented for defining ETDWRD selects is similar to this one 21302 OL x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work Hith Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule Analysis 3 1 Analyze files in LG LIB Property EDTHAD Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 5 Type information press Enter Relationship EQ xEQ CT Start Column Search criteria Z Z 4 4 nee f f F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel 16 80 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO06S4 16 80 Hd 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM H Figure 11 8 Explanation of Panel Relationship Docu Mint supports two relationships EQ and CT If you select EQ Docu Mint will evaluate each Edit Word entry beginning with the column specified for the number of spaces of each edit word or edit word portion that you enter
196. lude INP only fields Y Y Yes Type options press Enter 2 Edit 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Rename 8 Display desc Opt Field File Program Library Attr Usage ____ PDPGH GN PDFF DB RP DB LIB R Inp 0ut ____ PDPGM GN PDFL2 DB 0450 DB LIB R Inp 0ut ____ PDPGH GN PDFF GC 604 GNHJAVSRE R Inp Use ___ PDPGH GN PDFL9 GC PDL GN JAVA R Inp ModD Use ____ PDPGM GN PDFL2 GC PHM GN JAVA R Inp 0ut Use ___ PDPGH GN PDFF GN APD GN LIB R Inp ModD ___ PDPGH GN PDFF GN CJP GN LIB R Inp ModD ____ PDPGH GN PDFF GN CPL GN LIB R Inp ModD ____ PDPGM GN PDFF GN DFP GN LIB R Inp 0ut Use ____ PDPGH GN PDFF GN DRN GN LIB R Inp Out ModD ____ PDPGH GN PDFLS GN EP2 GN LIB R Inp ModD ____ PDPGM GN PDFF GN 604 GN SRC R Inp ModD ____ PDPGH GN PDFF GN 609 GN LIB R Inp ModD ___ PDPGH GN PDFF GN JC1 GN LIB R Inp Use ____ PDPGM INTERNAL GN PDL GN LIB R ModD More F3 E xit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F23 More options F24 More keys i gt 6 7 6 amp 7 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 7 8 Using the Work with Program Field Usage Display This section describes the various elements of the Work with Program Field Usage list display Field To position the list type the beginning characters or more of the new field name and press Enter After positioning the list to that field the prompt will revert to it s default value of Fi
197. lue using as the last character Press F4 on the Object Type parm for a list of valid object types The remaining options from the menu DM ANZ present command prompts similar to the one shown above except that the object type is assumed 146 Section IIl Menu Reference Option 20 Menu DM FILE File Documentation Menu Use option 20 from the DM ANZ menu to present the File Documentation Menu Below is an illustration of this menu ifm 270 Screen Shots Session tsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal a Sisi x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM F ILE Business Computer Design VGROMO Docu Mint File Documentation Menu 1 Document Files DOCFILE 2 Database File Layouts DBFLAYO 3 Display File Layouts DSPFLAYO 4 Printer File Layouts PRTFLAYO 90 Sign Off Selection or command F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F1i4 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 E8 gt 21 7 21 7 ko IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 10 3 DOCFILE Document File The DOCFILE command initiates an analysis of a file within a library The same degree of analysis is done as that produced by the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command the difference being that all objects requested by a DOCxxx command will be analyzed even if the object was successfully analyzed previously and has not been changed or recompiled since DBFL
198. ly omit a field that you DO want to keep in the Select list press F8 from this panel to work with the Omit records and use option 4 Select to explicitly include the field in the Select list When you press F8 option 4 will toggle between a Select and an Omit depending on what the list is currently displaying 6 Print Worksheet Select option 6 to print the Programmer Work Sheet This report prints summary or detail information for each program affected by the proposed file changes The report indicates probable source code changes that relate to fields selected by the analysis and for fields indirectly affected or affecting these fields 7 DSPF PRTF Usage Use option 7 to print a list of all the fields selected for that program Option 7 is more fully documented in a section below 8 Fields that affect this field Fields for which this option is valid show an 8 next to the options column When you select option 8 Docu Mint displays a list of the fields that affect the field selected This option is documented in detail in a section below 184 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions 9 Fields affected by this field Fields for which this option is valid show a 9 next to the options column When you select option 9 Docu Mint displays a list of the fields that the selected field affects This option is documented in detail in a section below 10 Print Results Option 10 runs the File Field Listing by Program report When you selec
199. lysis real 2 PGM Analyze programs in LG LIB Programs selected LG LIB ALL Program eee E 7 8 9 Direct reference in PGM DSPF Library Show 7 8 9 records only _ Y Yes Field so roaa aao Filter Inp usage _ Y Yes Type options press Enter 4 0mit 5 Display 6 Print work sheet 7 DSPF PRTF Usage 8 Fids that affect this flid 9 Fids affected by this fid 10 Print Results Opt Program File Field Orign Ln De T Usage 789 Text _LG B01 LDA G HK002 DS 6 0 S Inp 89 LG B01 LDAH HKO03 DS 6 0 S Inp 89 __ LG B01 PSDS JBDT 6 0 S Inp _LG B01 LG DETL3 LDLCDT UNKN 6 0 P Inp Out Mod Log Close Dat LG B01 LG DETL3 LDLODT xUNKN 6 0 P Inp Out MHod 9 Log Date __ _LG B01 xINTERNAL LVO2 INT 6 0 P ModD 8 LG B01 xINTERNAL LV03 xINT 6 0 P ModD 8 __ _LG B01 xINTERNAL LV04 INT 6 0 P ModD 8 LG B01 PSDS TIME 6 0 S Inp LG B01 x INTERNAL UG TM INT 6 0 P ModD 89 __ _LG B01 X xINTERNAL UMDY INT 6 0 P ModD 8 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F8 Omitted Reds F9 File Fields only More Fi0 View by Field Fi2 Cance F20 Print results F21 Print Work Sheet 04 29 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO06S4 4 29 K 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM gt Figure 11 19 Explanation of Panel This panel displays a list of the fields selected by an analysis including the program file and field names and the field attributes In addition the fourth column includes a summary o
200. lysis If you press F8 to view the omitted fields option 4 toggles to a Select action allowing you to explicitly select fields that may have mistakenly been omitted 5 Display Option 5 displays additional field information including the field name file and library edit code field text and column headings 6 Print Results Use option 6 to print a report of the analysis results When you select option 6 a window is presented similar to this one Extended Field Analysis Report Criteria Selected analysis 1 F4 List FILE Analyze files in LG LIB From file LG CALD Name To file LG CALD Name Include omitted fields V Yes F12 Cance Figure 11 13 The report will include a list of all selected fields and optionally the omitted ones from the file selected LG CALD To print the results for all the files selected use Function 21 from the panel above or change the from and to file values here to low and high values 7 Where Used Use option 7 to drill down and display a list of files and programs where the selected field is referenced This option is described in more detail in the next section below 8 Rule Info Type option 8 next to a field to present a panel displaying the rule that selected that field Explanation of Functions F8 0mitted Selected Records Press F8 to toggle between displaying selected vrs omitted fields F10 View by Field File Field Press F10 to toggle between viewing the list of fields
201. mand reference 229 PRTPGMEXP command reference 230 Print Program Explosion 150 Index 255 Q QADBEDEP showing WWU file dependencies 247 Qualified Select Omit analysis rule 170 Re analyzing Individual Objects 146 Ref 177 REFFLDXREF command reference 232 Reference Field Cross Reference Report 117 using the command 117 Relationship Between FILE and PGM Analyses 179 Replace object default value 208 report headers default company setting 132 Reports extended field analysis results 191 RMVLVL 210 RSHLIBCNT command reference 234 executing from the WWL panel 51 Refresh Library Object Count 92 RSHLIBCTL command reference 234 RSHLIBCTL Refresh Library Control 92 Rule Info displaying analysis rules 175 Rules 162 for PGM Analyses 180 overview of usage 162 S SCN command reference 235 Scan Source 124 using the command 124 256 Index searching for character strings 124 security code 16 Security Codes activating Docu Mint 16 SELEC WHxx END 126 Select Field Properties 164 Select Omit Rules overview of usage 162 Source setting alternate definitions 138 Source Not Found Errors 54 source references to fields displaying 188 source object link correcting when faulty 138 splash screen turning on off 132 storage issues clearing excess internal records 211 STRDOC configuring initial panel 46 STRLIBANZ command reference 238 executing from WWL 49 grouping libs for analysis 58 using the command 87 S
202. may be requested in one of the following ways u Selecting option 4 from Docu Mint menu DM PGM a Execute command PRTPGMEXP from a command line Command Parameters PGM Specify the programs to include on the report This parameter can accept a single program name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry must be a valid library name JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the special value NONE is not recommended called programs It is recommended you run the PRTPGMEXP command under the same library list that the programs themselves would normally be run under The library list of the job description is used to resolve the library names of Program Explosion Report The Program Explosion Reports are created with the following spool file attributes a Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT a User data USRDTA PgmExpDir Directory a User data USRDTA PgmExpRpt Program explosions Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 231 PRTUNUSOBJ Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values OBJ Object Name Object name OBJTYPE Object Type ALL selected object type PGM MODULE etc JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The PRT
203. must be a valid library name or the special value LIBL STRSEQ This parameter is used in conjunction with the Ending sequence number ENDSEQ parameter to identify a range of RPG source records to be indented Enter one of the following for the STRSEQ parameter a A source sequence number of the first RPG source record to process a FIRST to process the first record in the source member a CALCS to limit the report to calculation specifications and compile time array table entries 222 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference ENDSEQ This parameter is used in conjunction with the Starting sequence number STRSEQ parameter to identify a range of RPG source records to be indented Enter one of the following for the ENDSEQ parameter a A source sequence number of the last RPG source record to process a LAST to process the source member through the last record SYMBOL This character is used to join matching structured programming operation codes COLUMNS Specifies how many characters to indent This parameter accepts a numeric value of 0 through 5 with the suggested default being 2 A value of 0 will suppress indentation giving you the equivalent of a source listing OUTPUT Controls whether to display or print the indented RPG source member This parameter accepts a value of Display or PRINT Print PAGEBRK When printing the indented RPG source this parameter controls whether or not to print a report heading a
204. n Analyzed Files Work with FILE i 1 Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search DM DEMOLIB ALL Analysis Cross Reference panel From here you F3 Exit FS Refresh F8 Show attached FILE entries Bottom Fi2 Cancel can link any B gt 5 40 number of 5 40 Hb IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 FILE analyses to your PGM analysis Type a description for your analysis For the program name enter ALL in DM DEMOLIB Also select an option 1 next to the FILE analysis we created in order to use the results from that in our PGM analysis as shown here For a complete explanation of the relationship between PGM and FILE analyses please refer to Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions When you press Enter Docu Mint will indicate that the selected FILE analysis has been linked to the new PGM analysis Then when you press Enter once more Docu Mint presents the Work with Select Rule Detail panel We dont need to create any more new rules so just press Enter on this panel to return to the Work with Extended Field Analysis panel which now includes your new PGM analysis in the list Select an option 1 next to the PGM analysis to run it At the Submit Analysis Process window press Enter to submit the job You can press F14 WRKSBMJOB to monitor the progress of the job 40 Section Installation and Tutorial When the job finishes running and disappears from your list of submitted jobs select option 9 ne
205. n Setup Script Window Help Work With Extended Field Analysis Analysis process number Type options press Enter 1 Analyze 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete S Display 6 Print rules 7 Hork with rules 8 Print results 9 Hork with results Opt Proc Type Description Objects Analyzed 1 FILE Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search DM DEMOL IB ALL F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create Fi2 Cancel Bottom Fi4 Submitted jobs Fei Report Menu B gt 3 40 3 40 M IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NuM 4 Once the analysis has completed you can press F14 to confirm that it has select option 9 next to your analysis in the panel at right to present a panel to work with your results Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 37 The first panel of iojxi Fie Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help your results Work With SELECTED Field Entries Analysis 2 1 FILE Docu Mint Demo App Price Field Search should be similar Process selection DMHDEMOLIB ALL FEIR s wets al amp BL oy el se I to the one shown Field name R h File attributes ALL ALL PF LF Type options press Enter at ng t 4 0mit field 5 Display 6 Print results 7 Where used 8 Rule info Opt File name Field Lngth Dc Tp Text s _ CUSTMST CACTBL 7 2 P Account Balance Note that besides Z CUSTMST CCURDU 7 2P Current Due _ CUSTMST COVR30 7 2P Over 30 Days the various Z cUSTMST COVRE0 7 2P Over 60 Days fi ld _ C
206. n the child objects of just one or a few of those that come up in the list Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 31 Now return to the WWO screen and select option 8 WRKWHRUSE on the file COMPMST At right is an illustration of the panel presented You can use this command to present a list of the objects that use the one s that you choose When you execute this option you can select the object and object type 15m 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E B x File Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help Work with Where Used WRKWHRUSE Type choices press Enter Child object gt HOMPMST PRV ALL name generic Child object type gt FILE PRV ALL ANY type Library list PRYV ALL PRY JOB name Indent pattern PRV PRV pattern Columns to indent PRV PRV 1 2 3 UT DUT s i earl Be ae A PRINT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel Fi3 How to use this display Fe4 More keys B gt 5 37 5 37 fE IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 as well as the range of libraries to run over For this example make sure that you have DM DEMOLIB in your library list before running the command as your run time library list affects the content of your output Press Enter to accept the defaults shown above At right is an illustration of the output This displays a list of the programs
207. n the fields selected there After you optionally define the rules for the PGM analysis you can run the analysis using option 1 from the Work With Extended Field and Program Analysis panel Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 181 CONSTANT Selection Constant Name When you choose a rule of type CONSTANT a panel similar to the one below is presented 21302 oOo x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule Analysis 1 1 4 Initial analysis of programs in GN LIB Property CONSTANT Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 2 Type information press Enter Relationship BEQ EQ CT Start Colum 1 Search criteria 10000 01 F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fil Delete Fi2 Cancel 12 25 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 12 25 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM al H Figure 11 18 Explanation of Panel Relationship Two relationships can be defined in CONSTANT rules EQ and CT If you select EQ Docu Mint will evaluate each line of code beginning with the column specified for the number of spaces of each search criteria entry If you select CT Docu Mint will check for the search criteria from the start column to the end of the line Start Column Enter the column at which to begin selecting the search criteria value See the comments above for the importance of the
208. n the software The Work with System Libraries and Work with Analyzed Objects which we may also refer to as WWL and WWO list your libraries and analyzed objects respectively and provide access to many of the other commonly used features Once you master these you can use the rest of the manual as a reference tool for using Docu Mint on a daily basis The command and menu reference sections of the guide will give you additional help with using some of the more obscure features in the software as well as details on the supported parameter values for every command The sections on the extended field analysis functions teach you how to isolate certain types of fields in your files and programs and check their usage If necessary you can select from one of the several reports available for printing your findings Please note that the software includes extensive help information on all screens and command prompts almost the entire contents of this guide So if at any time you have a doubt about how something works just press F1 or the Help key If you have questions about installing or using Docu Mint please contact our Technical Support team at 250 655 1766 Monday to Friday from 7 30 AM to 5 00 PM PST You can also email us any time at excel excelsystems com Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions 13 Installing or Upgrading to Docu Mint V6R5M0 Follow the instructions below to install Docu Mint Release V6R5M0O If you
209. nctions available from those panels please refer to the appropriate section in Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration WRKPGMFLD Command The Work with Program Field Usage command provides you with a list interface to field usage within RPG programs From this list you can perform operations on the programs such as change copy delete display and rename WRKPGMELD performs these operations by calling commands with substitution values passed from the list of items you are working with Work with Program Field Usage may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 4 from Docu Mint menu DM FLD Menu DM EFLD can be reached by selecting option 3 from menu DM MAIN u Type WRKPGMELD on any command line For a description of the panels presented by the WRKPGMFLD command and the options available to you from them please refer to the section on this command in Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 242 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference WRKUSEOB or WUO Command Parameters Keyword OBJ LIB OBJTYPE DSPGENUSG DSPOBJTYPE DSPTYPALL DSPTYPVAR LIBL TRTBLKLIB TRTVARLIB DSPLIBNAM MAXLVL INDPTN COLUMNS OUTPUT Description Parent object name Parent object library name Parent object type Display generic usage definition Limit output of child objects to 1 type Display object type ALL Include refs to objects determined by program variable at run time Lib list to use when re
210. ndow Help DM LIB Business Computer Design V6GROMO Docu Mint Library Selection and Analysis Menu DEMO 1 Mark Library For Analysis MRKLIB 2 Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ 3 Library Analysis Error Report PRTANZERR 4 Clear Extended Program Field Analysis Records by library CLRPGMXREF 11 Refresh Library Control File system library directory RSHLIBCTL 12 Refresh Library Object Count RSHLIBCNT 90 Sign off Selection or command F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 21 7 21 7 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM Figure 5 1 This chapter describes each of these options in detail The commands are also described in the Command Reference section at the end of this guide Option 1 Mark Library for Analysis The Mark Library command must be used in order to flag a library to be loaded into Docu Mint s internal cross reference files by a subsequent run of the Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ command Marking a library takes only a few seconds and does not execute any analysis of the library s contents Any number of libraries may be marked during the course of the day and then analyzed by a single execution of Start Library Analysis command You may also use the MRKLIB command to remove library information from the Docu Mint cross reference files This is something you might do if a library h
211. ne blank space between them All entries must be enclosed in single quotes If you specify EQ as the relationship Docu Mint evaluates each line of column headings beginning with the column specified for the number of characters of each of the search entries If you specify CT as the relationship Docu Mint evaluates each line of column headings beginning at the start column and to the end of the line for each of the search entries 166 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions EDTCDE Selection Edit Code When you build a rule of type EDTCDE Docu Mint scans the field edit code entries for the entered value s The panel presented for defining ETDCDE selection rules is similar to the one shown below 21302 oT x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule Analysis 3 1 Analyze files in LG LIB Property EDTCDE Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 5 Type information press Enter Relationship x EQ xEQ CT Start Column 1 y Search criteria F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel 16 29 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 16 23 AO 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM ica Figure 11 7 Explanation of Panel Relationship Docu Mint allows you to use two relationships EQ and CT In the case of the EDTCDE rule these work the same way When the analysis is executed Docu Mint eva
212. nformation appearing in the main used objects list After making any changes and pressing Enter the list is rebuilt based on the new selection criteria Each prompt on the Subset Work with Used Objects display corresponds to a parameter of the WRKUSEOBJ command Below is an illustration of the Subset Work with Used Objects panel ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Mint Subset Hork with Used Objects WUOF 17 01 Type choices press Enter Parent object GN GO1 xALL name xgener icx Library 1 eee GN LIB ALL name Parent object type PGM ALL CMD xMENU xPGM Display generic usage ALL ALL ALC DLT EXC Display child object type xALL xALL xtype Display child object type ALL xNO VES NO Display child object type VAR YES VES NO Maximum explosion level 3 NOMAX number F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Change defaults rK gt 5 37 5 37 Ko IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 4 4 The command parameters shown above represent a subset of those available when you initially run the WRKUSEOBJ command and are described in detail in Section V Docu Mint Command Reference F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See Using the Change Session Defaults Display bel
213. ng the screen size does not cause the list to be rebuilt Chapter 6 Menu DM 0B J Object Cross Reference 99 F4 List F4 presents a display that allows you to select a named library list from a list of predefined library lists For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F6 Edit F6 presents a display that allows you to modify the library list used by WUO when resolving object libraries A value of USRDEN User defined denotes a unique combination of libraries not represented by a named library list For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See the previous section of this chapter for a description of how to use the panel presented F18 Change Docu Mint defaults Presents a display which allows you to select the default values for certain operations in Docu Mint For additional information on the changing Docu Mint defaults refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 100 Section Ill Menu Reference Option 3 Work with Where Used The Work with Where Used WWU option allows you to present a list interface for locating where objects are used on your system From this list you can perform operations such as copy delete edit and rename When you select the Work with Where Used option
214. nt object 9 Browse source member Select option 9 for an individual entry to browse the source for the selected object F3 Exit If you have used option 7 to drill down through a set of program calls F3 will return you to the last level you were at If you drilled down below your initial Chapter 10 Menu DM ANZ Object Documentation 151 explosion level or have returned to your first explosion level F3 exits the command F9 Browse parent source member The parent object is shown at the top of the panel Press F9 from this screen to browse the source for this member 152 Section Ill Menu Reference SECTION Extended Field Analysis Functions In this Section Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports Extended Field Analysis Functions Overview Docu Mint s Extended Field Analysis features provide the functionality to analyze and identify specific file fields determine what programs reference and use these file fields and document the programs which will require changes The extended field analysis utilizes the file and program information derived from the Docu Mint library analysis The steps involved to perform this analysis are described below 1 Mark and Analyze Libraries Before proceeding the libraries requiring extended analysis must be marked with a LOAD option using the MRKLIB command and analyzed using the STRLIBANZ command When you prompt the command pr
215. nter one of the following for the RPTMBRS parameter u YES If no find strings are found in a particular source member include the source member on the report with the message Find String s Not Found in Member u NO Report only those source members whose contents contain one or more of the find strings IGNCOMM Specify whether or not to ignore any find string occurrences appearing in comment lines Comment lines are determined according to the syntax of the source as determined by the source type Enter a value of NO or YES for this parameter JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 237 CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the special value NONE is not recommended Scan Source Report The Scan Source report is created with the following spool file attributes Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT and User data USRDTA ScnSource STRLIBANZ Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIBGRP 1 10 library names or group names Library name s Group name s ALL INCLUDE Load Include libraries marked for loading YES NO INCLUDE Remove _ Include libraries marked for YES NO removal INCLUDE No Action Include libraries marked for no YES NO action RGZPFM
216. nts a snapshot of the libraries on your system along with some additional information about each of them In particular it shows the current mark status of the library and if and when each library has been analyzed by Docu Mint From this panel you also have direct access to many of the most important functions of the software including the Work with Analyzed Objects screen described in the next chapter The illustration above displays the panel in 132 column mode Yours will also display that way if your emulation is set up to that If not only 80 columns are displayed and the library description is only shown when you press F11 Alternate View Use the library entry field at the top of the panel to position the display to a particular library name or use the Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll through the list In addition there is also a filtering option that allows you to set the list to show only analyzed libraries To do this just type Y into the Analyzed libraries only option and press Enter The options and function keys on the Work with System Libraries panel are a hybrid of those available from the Work with Libraries Using PDM panel and of functionality specific to Docu Mint You can also tailor the available options to suit your specific needs by pressing F8 Options Config and making changes to the default set Below is a detailed description of the WWL panel and all its options and functions Library Information Dis
217. o begin adding an alternate source file reference Im 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal i T i fe xj File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Library Analysis Errors Object Name St ee ar dara na ae ee G Object Library ss accessos LG LIB ALL Name Object Type Display Objects in Error Only 6 Add alternate source reference Alternate Source Reference Compiled From Source Search Look In Source Errid File Library Seq File Library CPF4102 QRPGSRC LG HSRC 0 QRPGSRC LG LIB F4102 F4102 I lt Y Yes N No F3 Exit Fie Cancel CPF4102 OL R20C LG L IB PGM CLP LG R20C QCLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL O22 LG L IB PGM RPG LG 022 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 6 OL 070 LG L IB PGM RPG LG6 070 QRPGSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL 083C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 083C QcLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL 084C LG L IB PGM CLP LG 084C QcLsRe LG SRC CPF4102 OL 085C LG L IB PGM CLP LG O85C QcLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 OL 086C LG L IB PGM CLP LG O86C QcLSRC LG SRC CPF4102 _ TS 004 LG L IB PGM RPG TS 004 QRPGSRC KEVINH CPF4102 Fii Dsp err msg txt F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel Bottom F21 Prt anz err rpt LE gt 11 62 11 62 4D IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 1 3 The example above illustrates a situation where multiple source members werent found in LG SRC QRPGSRC because of our practice of promoting the source to LG LIB without recompiling the objects when develo
218. o just showing commands Working with Library Groups Docu Mint supports the ability to group libraries together to simplify the process of analyzing related libraries There are two ways to group libraries together a Using the CHGLIBATR command When you change library attributes one of the options available is a group name to assign the library to a Using the Work with Docu Mint Library Groups interface You can run the CHGLIBATR command at any time from within Docu Mint either from a command line or from one of the menus where it as available The Work with Library Groups panel can be presented by pressing F6 from the WWL panel executing the WRKLIBL command or selecting it as an option from the DM CFG menu The panel presented is similar to this one l5 x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work with Docu Mint Library Groups Group Name 2 2 Type options press Enter 1 Work with libraries 2 Change 4 Delete S Display Group Group Opt Name Description _ SAME _ DOCDEMO Docu Mint Demo Apps _ LOGAPP Telephone Log Application _ PROGEN ProGen Plus Development HEBSMART ProGen WebSmart Development Libs Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create B gt 1073 10 3 f IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0100 via Telnet Nu 7 Figure 3 6 58 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Press F6 to add a new entry or use option 2 to change the name or description of an existing group To wo
219. ob description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Database File Layouts Report The Database File Layouts report is created with the following spool file attributes a Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT a User data USRDTA DspfLayo INDCLSRC Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values SRCMBR Source member name Valid CL source member SRCFILE Source file name Valid CL source file STRSEQ Starting sequence number Sequence number low value 1 FIRST ENDSEQ Ending sequence number Sequence number high value LAST SYMBOL Character used to join matching DO Any valid keyboard character ENDDO commands OUTPUT Controls whether to display or print PRINT PAGEBRK Controls whether to print report NO YES headings at the top of each page The Indent CL Source command produces an indented listing of a CLP source member The list will identify related DO ENDDO commands connecting them with a separator character and indenting any commands nested within the DO ENDDO pair Indent CL Source may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 2 from Docu Mint menu DM UTL Menu DM UTL can be reached by selecting option 4 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command INDCLSRC from a command line a Type IND ona subfile option line 220 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Command Parameters SRCMBR Specify the name
220. object usage is described by the name of the command or procedure operating on a given object For an explanation of the special object usage descriptions defined by Docu Mint refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 Text This is a description of the object Note that the Generic input field see next appears below this heading on 80 character displays Generic You can use this field to change the generic usage subset criteria Due to space limitations this input field appears below the Text heading on 80 character displays In the list portion of the screen this column displays the generic usage value for the object Due to space limitations this field does not appear on 80 character displays Function Keys F14 Actual Resolved library names Press F14 to toggle the display between showing the actual library names from the object cross reference file or the resolved library names as determined by Docu Mint Pressing F14 is equivalent to flipping the Display library name parameter from ACTUAL to RESOLVE or vice versa 96 Section III Menu Reference F16 Position to Toggles between positioning the display to the top of the list and the bottom of the list F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See Using the Subset Work with Used Objects Display below for further information F18 Change defaults Presents a display that allows y
221. of information includes more details for the object source including the source file and library names and the source member Finally the last changed date and time is also shown 62 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Cross Reference Load History These columns display details related to when the cross reference information was first and last updated A non blank value in the Errld column indicates that an error was encountered during the previous analysis of the object Create Save and Change Date Time These columns display the date and time that the object was last created saved or modified Explanation of WWO Options Many of the options below are customized to behave appropriately to the type of object they are selected against For example the display option will execute the DSPDTAARA command if you select it next to a data area and the DSPPGM command if you select a program To work with or add to the defaults included with Docu Mint you can press F8 Options config from the WWO screen and select option 2 next to each option The section The Work with Used Objects Command on page 67 below describes the options configuration screens 2 Change As mentioned above the action executed by the change option can be customized from the options configuration screen F8 to vary what it does depending on the object type selected For example the default action executed when option 2 Change is selected for a program obj
222. of the CL source member to indent SRCFILE Specify the name of the source file where the CL source member is located The library qualifier must be a valid library name or the special value LIBL STRSEQ The starting sequence number parameter is used in conjunction with the Ending sequence number ENDSEQ parameter to identify a range of CL source records to be indented Enter one of the following for the STRSEQ parameter a A source sequence number of the first CL source record to process a _ FIRST to process the first record in the source member ENDSEQ The ending sequence number parameter is used in conjunction with the Starting sequence number STRSEQ parameter to identify a range of CL source records to be indented Enter one of the following for the ENDSEQ parameter a A source sequence number of the last CL source record to process u LAST to process the source member through the last record SYMBOL Specifies the character used to join matching DO ENDDO commands OUTPUT Controls whether to display or print the indented CL source member This parameter accepts a value of Display or PRINT Print PAGEBRK When printing the indented CL source this parameter controls whether or not to print a report heading at the top of each page YES or to print through the page perforations NO Due to the nature of the report it is sometimes easier to follow the flow of the indented listing if the report headings
223. ogram CMLIB ALL Process 3 PGM CM programs in CMLIB Analysis date 2007 10 31 14 07 22 Program CM CMSConvert DSPMSGD outfile to dbf CD MSGF Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM CMS Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 2 No DDS code changes required Files used CD ULDF CMLIB SEU activity detail child to CD ULGF SOURCE LIBL SEU activity detail child to CD ULGF Program CM LDT Log detailed source changes to CM ULDF Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM LDT Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 2 No DDS code changes required Files used CD ULGF CMLIB Compile and edit control file for source CD CMPF CMLIB Compile and edit control file for source Program CM LED Log Edit STRSEU stuff Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM LED Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 2 No DDS code changes required Files used CD CMPL1 CMLIB By User id activity date CM LGIFM CMLIB Display log of compile attempts and SEU attempts Program CM PSS Shell Source Modification Listing Source CMLIB QRPGSRC CM PSS Approximate number of lines of RPG code to change 4 No DDS code changes required Files used F UPDAT LIBL Shell Source Modification Listing CD ULGL3 ASYS Shell Source Modification Listing CM UL1FM CMLIB SEU Transactions by User Display File Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports 201 11 03 97 9 05 14 Program Change Requirements Work Sheet Page 2 Summary From program CMLIB ALL To program CMLIB ALL Process 3 PGM
224. ollowing ways a Selecting option 1 from Docu Mint menu DM CFG Menu DM CFG can be reached by selecting option 4 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command CHGDOCCTL from a command line For an illustration of the panel presented when you run the CHGDOCCTL command and an explanation of how to use that panel please refer to Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration CHGDOCDFT Command The Change Docu Mint Defaults command presents a display which allows you to select default values used by various operations within Docu Mint Change Docu Mint Defaults may be initiated in one of the following ways a Execute command CHGDOCDFT from a command line a Pressing F18 from one of Docu Mint s Change Session Defaults displays When you run the CHGDOCDFT command the panel below is presented ziojxi Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Mint Change Docu Mint Defaults CHGDOCDFT Type choices press Enter Object library DM DEMOLIB Name CURLIB SRCLIB Replace object iN Y Yes N No Job description QBATCH Name USRPRF NONE Library 2 ew LIBL Name CURLIB LIBL Default source file QRPGSRC Name Library 2 e QGPL Name CURLIB LIBL F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel LE gt 6 35 6 35 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 13 1 Object library Type the name of the library where you want to place objects resulting from a compilation if the Compile op
225. om your last use of the Work with Where Used command OB The Child Object parm specifies the name of the object you want to find where it is being used Use this parameter along with the Child object type parameter to subset the list of objects shown at the primary child level of the list This parameter can accept a single object name a generic name or the special value ALL Note Special value ALL will display references to the value ALL for example DLTOVR FILE ALL not references to all objects on your system as you might expect The main reason for this anomaly is that Docu Mint stores references to variable values as well as real object names Displaying all object references then would create a child level record for each unique program variable name used in all of your programs and make the where used list unmanageable Also the structure of Docu Mint s object cross reference file would make retrieving this type of list very time consuming Ways of overcoming this limitation are being considered for a future version of Docu Mint OBJTYPE The Child Object Type parm specifies the type of object requested by the Child object parameter Enter a valid OS 400 object type or the special Docu Mint pseudo object type PROC Something that has been a source of confusion to many Docu Mint users over the years has been the meaning of the ALL value for the OBJTYPE parm on the WRKWHRUSE command The instinctive expectation for m
226. ommand line Command Parameters MENU Specify the menus to include on the report This parameter can accept a single menu name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry must be a valid library name EXPLODE Controls whether or not to explode the programs executed by the menu options This parameter accepts a value of NO or YES JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or 228 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference CURLIB Due to the potential of a long running job use of the special value NONE is not recommended called programs if EXPLODE YES was specified It is recommended you run the PRTMNUEXP command under the same library list that the menu options themselves would normally be run under if you want to explode the menu options The library list of the job description is used to resolve the library names of Menu Explosion Report The Menu Explosion Report is created with the following spool file attributes a Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT a User data USRDTA MnuOptRpt for EXPLODE NO a User data USRDTA MnuExpRpt for EXPLODE YES PRTORPHOBJ Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIB Library to check Library name ALLUSR JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job descri
227. on of Panel If any of the first three values are changed Library list Treat blank library names as and Treat variable library names as the list is rebuilt The next three prompts Display library name Indent pattern and Columns to indent will change the appearance of the information appearing in the list without rebuilding the list The final prompt Screen size appears only if the workstation you are using is capable of supporting a 27 by 132 character display Type 3 to select a 24 by 80 screen size 4 to select a 27 by 132 screen size Changing the screen size does not cause the list to be rebuilt 72 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects F4 List F4 presents a display that allows you to select a named library list from a list of predefined library lists For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F6 Edit F6 presents a display that allows you to modify the library list used by WUO when resolving object libraries A value of USRDEN User defined denotes a unique combination of libraries not represented by a named library list For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See the previous section of this chapter for a description of how to use the panel presented F18 C
228. ontrol File on page 141 Roll Up Down In addition to the expected function of paging a subfile the roll keys can also be used to position a subfile line to the top of the page By placing the cursor on a subfile line to the right of the option field you can position that line to the top of the page by pressing Roll up F3 Exit Exits the panel without processing any options or changes you entered on the input prompts F4 Prompt Provides assistance for the option s you select in a list or the command you enter on a command line For commands F4 provides an entry display for the parameters relating to that command F5 Refresh Changes the prompts back to their original values and clears the options and command line without repositioning the list F9 Retrieve Displays the last command you typed on a command line Press F9 twice to see the next to last command you typed and so on until the command you want to see is displayed F10 Command entry Displays a command entry display F10 Prev view F11 Next view Changes the view of information shown in the subfile F12 Cancel Cancels the current screen without processing any options or changes you entered on the input prompts 22 Section Installation and Tutorial F23 More options Shows the next set F24 More keys Shows the next set Docu Mint Terminology of options available for the display of function keys available for the display Docu Mint employs several di
229. opy Delete SeDisplay 7 Renane 8 Display description 10 Docunent 11 Hove 12 Hork nith Opt Object Library Type Attr Seq Usage Text Gener ic GNyGO1 GHL IB 4PGH ALL __ GNG0T GN LIB PCH RPGLE Parent Procen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R GNaGOT CHaL IB MODULE BOUND Hodule not found on syster COPY GHaSZSUPR CHSRC ODULE RPGL BOUND Zero suppress routine RPGHOD ac0PY GNASOTSAY GNHLIB SRUPGH RPGL BOUND Proen Plus c 1988 99 ExceISystens rel 5 02R REF l GNa601H50 GNaLIB MODULE BOUND Hodule not found on syster COPY __ 1 GNa601h51 GNHSRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Is fld PGHFIELD If so return int nahe RPGHOD COPY l l GHaFPPL1 GNaLIB FILE LF 18 00 INP Progen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R DCLF l GNa601h52 GNHSRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Functions for Hork fields RPGHOD COPY GNa601h53 GNHSRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Retrieve existing generated code to Hrite RPGHOD 4COPY GNaGO1HS4 GN SRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Open and access Tenplate Attributes file RPGHOD 4 OPY LL GHATPAL1 GHNaLIB 4FILE LF 19 00 INP ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R 4OCLF Botton F3 Exit F4 Proupt Fo Refresh F9 Retrieve Fi2 Cancel F14 Actual library nanes Fe3sHore options F24 Hore keys K 8 2 822 Ko IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nu 5 Figure 6 7 Object You can use the object field to change the child object name After changing this value and press
230. ors encountered or print a report listing them From there you can also create alternate source file references which the analysis process can use to locate source members that weren t found on the first pass The process of reviewing analysis errors and defining alternate source references is a critical step in achieving the best analysis possible so you should Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 49 take some time to review and understand the steps involved The panel presented when you select option 10 is described in the section Working with Analysis Errors on page 54 of this chapter 12 Work with obj Use option 12 to execute the system command WRKOBJ which presents Work with Objects Using PDM screen limited to the library selected 14 Chg lib attrs The Change Library Attributes CHGLIBATR command is a Docu Mint command allowing you to among other things assign a library to a library group For additional details on library groups refer to the section Working with Library Groups on page 58 of this chapter There are also additional details in the section CHGLIBATR Command on page 209 of the Command Reference section 15 Clr xref files Docu Mint file field cross referencing information can be very voluminous in terms of the size of the database files used to record all this information If you don t need that level of detail in an analyzed library you can use option 15 to execute the Docu Mint command CLRPGMXREFE to cle
231. ou to change the parameters which control the appearance of the information appearing in the list See the section Using the Change Session Defaults Display below for further information F21 Print list Prints the current form of the list Options 10 Document Use option 10 to execute the DOCOBJ command for any entry in a used objects listing This command is useful for refreshing changed information in already analyzed libraries or when the listing includes an object that itself has not been previously analyzed The remaining options are similar to those available from PDM Chapter 6 Menu DM 0B J Object Cross Reference 97 Using the Subset Work with Used Objects Display Press F17 from the WUO panel or the Change Session Defaults panel to display the Subset Work with Used Objects panel From here you can make changes to the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the main used objects list After making any changes and pressing Enter the list is rebuilt based on the new selection criteria Each prompt on the Subset Work with Used Objects display corresponds to a parameter of the WRKUSEOBJ command Below is an illustration of the Subset Work with Used Objects panel ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Subset Hork with Used Objects HUOF 17 01 Type choices press Enter Parent object GN
232. ow Docu Mint works To work with these options select option 5 from the Docu Mint Main Menu or press F17 Config Menu from the Work with System Libraries panel Below is an illustration of the menu DM CFG iojxi File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DMHCFG Business Computer Design VE6ROMO Docu Mint Configuration Menu DEMO 1 Change Docu Mint Control Data CHGDOCCTL 2 Change Library Attributes CHGLIBATR 3 Work with Library Lists WRKLIBL 4 Configure STRDOC command 11 Maintain the Alternate Source Definitions File 12 Maintain Alternate ILE Module Object Library Reference File 13 Maintain the Options Control File 90 Sign Off Selection or command F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fi2 Cancel Fi8 Work with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 2 7 fo Figure 9 1 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet From here you can select options to run the commands CHGDOCCTL CHGLIBATR WRKLIBL and CFGSTRDOC You can also use options 11 and 12 to maintain the two alternate reference files for source and ILE module libs respectively Finally from here you can also maintain the Options Control File Option 1 Change Docu Mint Control Data Use this command to change the default company setting that is used in the report headers and also to turn on off the splash screen that initially comes up before the Main Menu is pre
233. ow for further information Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 71 Using the Change Session Defaults Display The Change Session Defaults display allows you to change the parameters controlling the appearance of the information in the main Used Objects list With the exception of Screen size each prompt on the Change Session Defaults display corresponds to a parameter of the WRKUSEOBJ command These are described in detail in Section V Docu Mint Command Reference under the WRKUSEOBJ command entry The Change Session Defaults display may be reached by pressing F18 from either the main used objects list or the Subset Work with Used Objects display Below is an illustration of this panel ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Change Session Defaults WUOF 18 01 Type choices press Enter Library list 2 2 B0B Name JOB F4 List F6 Edit Treat blank library names as LIBL Name CURLIB FLIB Treat variable ibrary names as LIBL Name CURLIB FLIB Display library name RESOLVE xACTUAL RESOLVE Indent pattern Lit BLANK pattern Columns to indent 2 1 2 3 Screen size 4 3 24x80 4 27x132 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Fi7 Subset F18 Change Docu Mint defaults K gt 5 39 5 39 KO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Nu 5 Figure 4 5 Explanati
234. owing command ADDLIBLE DM LIB and pressing Enter After adding the library to your list type strpoc and press Enter When you do this the Docu Mint splash screen appears press Enter once more You can turn the splash screen off once you purchase the software and install your permanent security code The first screen presented is the Work with System Libraries panel the main Docu Mint interface for working with the libraries and objects on your system For ease of readability the screen shots in this section have been taken in 80 column mode but depending on how your emulation is set up you may see this panel in 132 column mode on your own screen The Work with y h ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal w 10 xj File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help System Libraries Docu Mint Work With System Libraries VGROMO WWL panel Position to Analyzed libraries only N Y Yes N No displays a list of Type options press Enter H 1 Hrk w anz objs 2 Change lib 3 Copy 4 Delete the libraries on 5 Display detail 6 Start lib anz 7 Rename 8 Mark lib LOAD Analysis Lst Anz Lst Anz Total your system a Opt Library Mark Group Msg Id Date Time Objects __ DM DEMOLIB None 10 18 2001 13 40 09 50 summary obj ect DMHINST None Never 20 __ DM ISRC None Never 4 count and DMs LIB x None Never 574 __ DM NEWLIB None Never 50 when they were DMHNEWSRC None Never 7 __
235. p EQ Type information press Enter Field type J Valid DDS field type or N for all Numeric Field length 6 Field decimals F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cance All changes processed Press enter to continue 13 25 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 13 25 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Ki H Figure 11 5 Explanation of Panel This panel allows you to select a field type in combination with specific field attributes For example in this case we are defining a rule to select all 6 0 N fields Field Type You can use any valid DDS field type for this option such as A S or P You can also use N to correspond to all numeric field types Field Length and Decimals Type the field length and decimals of the fields to be selected The ATR rule will in many cases be the broadest rule that you will define and results in the selection of the greatest number of fields If the results include a group of fields that are different from what you need you can build a OMIT rule to exclude these For example if you define a ATR rule to include all fields that are 6 0 N when you were looking for dates and the results include many fields like Client Number or Customer Number you could then define another OMIT rule to exclude all fields where the field text included the word Number Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 165 COLHDG Selection Column Heading A panel similar to this one i
236. p Out LG DETL1 XGPL LDLODT LG 013FM LG LIB SUBCTL Inp Out LG DETL1 XGPL LDLODT Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel 01 01 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPCO6S4 1 1 Ko 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Ki H Figure 11 21 Explanation of Output This panel shows that the field LDLODT appears twice in the display file LG 013FM once in the subfile control and once in the subfile record portion of the panel In each case the usage is Inp Out At the far right of the list is the reference file lib and field Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 187 Fields that Affect this Field list Option 8 from Figure 11 19 When you select option 8 next to a field in your SELECT list Docu Mint displays a list of the fields that affect the field selected The panel showing the list of affected fields is similar to this one 421302 Lalki Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork with Affecting fields Program LG 046 Program Library LG LIB FRG 2 nee ee ee LG TSKL9 The field shown here is Library 2 2 ee XGPL affected by or modified by PIG rs sete Be AS TMSTDT the fields shown below Type options press Enter 8 Fields that affect this field 9 Fields affected by this field Opt Field File Library E PKO2 LG TSKL9 451 00 c Z ADDPKO2 TMSTDT Commen _ PKO2 LG TSKL9 464 00 c Z ADDPKO2 TMSTDT Commen _ ALL O LG TSKL9 NUMERIC 1795 00 H MOVEL ALL 0 THSTDT _ EPO
237. p as the gateway to calling the other programs The called programs include a few company and item maintenance programs as well as two reports with associated prompt panels and CL driver programs The database files include company customer and item masters as well as order header order detail and inventory files The first steps of the Quick Start to mark and analyze library DM DEMOLIB are essential After completing those steps you can try out commands other than the ones we illustrate without affecting the results of the exercise When you complete the exercise you can remove the demo records from Docu Mint s internal database by marking DM DEMOLIB with an action of REMOVE ALL then running the sTRLIBANZ command once more Then someone else can restart the exercise from scratch Because you arent familiar with the files and programs included in the DM DEMOLIB sample application you may find that the analysis results aren t all that meaningful to you We recommend that after completing the Quick Start which should familiarize you with using Docu Mint you go through a similar process with one or more of the libraries that you are most familiar with This will be your most effective learning tool towards becoming familiar with the layouts and output of the various Docu Mint commands and reports Have fun Quick Start Exercise To begin working with Docu Mint first add the product library to your library list by typing the foll
238. played As mentioned above when you first present the Work with System Libraries panel it displays a list of libraries along with some summary information about each of them Other than the library description this information corresponds to what is gathered as a result of the Docu Mint analysis process The information includes the following columns a Mark The selected action to be executed for the library next time it is analyzed a Group The library group name if any that the library belongs to u Analysis Msg ID The last analysis error message ID if any problems were encountered or ACTIVE for libraries currently being analyzed Chapter 3 Working with System Libraries 47 a Lst Anz Date Time The date and time that the library was last analyzed a Total Objects The total number of objects in the library a Library Description The library description In 80 column mode press F11 to toggle between views showing all this information Explanation of WWL Options The options available at the Work with System Libraries panel combine Docu Mint specific functionality with standard PDM options You can also customize many of the existing options or add new ones of your own A later section below describes how to do this This section describes the default options as they are set when you first install the software 1 Wrk w anz objs Option 1 presents the Work with Analyzed Objects WWO panel from which you can vi
239. pment is complete The alternate source reference above will instruct the analysis process where to look for the current version of the program source when it isnt found in LG SRC When you review the analysis error report remember that even though Docu Mint may have had a problem with some objects everything else has been analyzed Therefore at this point you can evaluate the nature of the errors you have encountered and if they arent unexpected you can decide to ignore the errors and continue or go back and fix the errors and resubmit your analysis Once your libraries have been analyzed as completely as possible you can then go on to the next stages The next section below lists some typical tasks you would perform with Docu Mint and how to do them Chapter 2 includes a Quick Start exercise that you can use if you would like a more robust keystroke by keystroke tour illustrating some of the main features beginning with the analysis process Chapter 1 Introduction amp Installation Instructions 19 Sample Docu Mint Tasks All of the tasks described below require that your libraries have already been analyzed How can I show a list of the objects used by one or many of my programs Use the WRKUSEOBJ command from a command line or option 9 from the Work with Analyzed Objects screen You can get to the Work with Analyzed Objects panel by using option 1 from the Work with System Libraries screen or using the the WWO comman
240. prompts you for a library name or you can also accept the default value of ALL libraries Here is a sample of the report output from the error report over the library DB LIB ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Spooled File QSYSPRT Page Line 1 2 Co luns 1 130 saralessstessadenee teresDeceetecacdecertecssDessetesssDecsatesselessstesssBescatesssIescetecssDersetaceslersstesestecnstesesd Business Conputer Design 1999 11 01 12 55 40 Page 1 Object Analysis Errors Report Source ource File Library ErrId Description GNHVSRC GNRLIB CPF4102 Source not found ORPGSRC DBWPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found OByOSHO DBalIB PGH RPG ORPGSRC DBWPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found OBHESD OBaL IB PGH RPG ORPGSRC DESPRE ORG1025 Unable to open the COPY Henber OB PGH DBaL IB 4PGH RPG OBsPGH ORPGSRC DBWUPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found DEaPGHO DBglIB PGH RPG OBsPGH ORPGSRC DBWUPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found DB 036 Deal IB PGH RPG B36 ORPGSAC OBHUPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found DB 0360 DBaLIB PGH RPG DB 036 ORPGSRC OBHUPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found OBHO45 Deg IB PGH RPG D045 ORPGSRC DBYUPDSRC CPF4102 Source not found wed END OF REPORT 4 He Object Library Type Attr GBEDSE81 DBaLIB PGH RPG DB 0SH DBaL IB PGH RPG Botton F3 Exit Fi2 Cancel Fi9 Left Fe0 Right F2g ore keys K 3 22 3 22 K I
241. pt F5 Refresh F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel Indent RPG Source INDRPGSRC press Enter ey a tance ay tera S l Character value x PRINT Bottom F13 How to use this display F24 More keys HK gt 5 37 5 37 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 8 5 126 Section IIl Menu Reference Enter the source member and file lib information for the RPG or RPGLE source member You can also specify starting and ending sequence numbers if you want as well as the indention symbol and number of columns to indent When you display the output to screen an additional option HILITE is presented after you first press Enter allowing you specify whether you would like to highlight the comments When you choose to print the output the additional option PAGEBRK is presented allowing you to specify whether to print page headings on each page or only at the beginning of the report Generally the printout is easier to read if the headings are only included at the beginning Below is a sample of the output from this command from a subfile option error handling routine in the program DDORDD in the demo library iam 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal a oj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Columns 1120 Brouse Dril IB OINDSRC SEU gt DDORDD aT E E E E E E O E E T A N E E E a A A D A E A 2 B71 00 Cx
242. pt Window Help Scan Source SCN Type choices press Enter Find stringy for more values Ignore case YES VES NO Hild card character Character Highlight character a Character Source file 2 ALL ALL name xgener icx Library 2 e a ee eee ALL xALL name gener icx Source member 2 2 we x ALL x ALL name genericx for more values Source type ALL xALL type genericx BLANK Report order 2 x SOURCE SOURCE STRING Report all members xYES YES NO Ignore comments YES VES NO Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Library 2 2 ee eee Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 Figure 8 2 Explanation of Options Enter up to 10 text strings to search for each string may contain up to 25 characters 124 Section IIl Menu Reference You can also specify a wild card character which has the effect that when this character appears within the find string any character in the source will be considered a match You must also enter values for the source file s member s to search and the source type For a complete description of all the parameters of the SCN command and their valid values please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference
243. ption The Orphaned Objects Report command produces a report of source and object discrepancies The Orphaned Objects Report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 4 from Docu Mint menu DM OBJ a Execute command PRTORPHOBJ from a command line Command Parameters LIB Specify the library whose objects should be checked for source discrepancies This parameter can accept a single library name or the special value ALLUSR to print the orphaned objects report for all user libraries JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Use of NONE is not recommended due to possible duration of job Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 229 Orphaned Objects Report The Orphaned Objects Report is created with the following spool file attributes Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT and User data USRDTA OrphObjRpt Possible Exception Messages Appearing on the Report Here is a list of possible messages appearing on the report Message Explanation x x Source not found k kk Source Object Time Discrepancy Object create date time Source change date time x x x k Source and Object Names do no match x Source member source member found in source file source file PRTPGMEXP Command Parameters
244. r media appears to be for a different version of the software contact BCD for instructions Upgrading From Previous Versions If at the time you install Docu Mint Release V6R5MO0 you have a previous version of the software on your system you will need to re analyze your libraries at the end of the installation process This is required because of the improvements that have been made to the analysis programs and changes to the internal file structures The installation process prompts you for a library name to save your current version of Docu Mint If for any reason you want to return to that version you can delete the new DM LIB and rename your saved library probably DM LIBOLD or DM LIB50 back to DM LIB Note that the old library may be quite large so after you get up and running with the new version you may want to save it to tape and delete it off your system or just delete it outright Your existing permanent security code is retained when you install the new release To enter a temporary security code refer to the separate instructions included in your documentation package What is Installed These are the major components installed on your IBM i 1 Library DM LIB This is the Docu Mint product library It contains all the programs files and other objects needed to make Docu Mint work 2 Library DM DEMOLIB This library contains demo files and programs to help you learn how to use the software 3 Library BCDSUPPT This i
245. ram Display file change requirements work sheet This option allows you to generate a detail report of all the programs and display files impacted by the fields in your analysis When you select option 2 a Chapter 12 Extended Field Analysis Reports 193 panel is presented at which you can enter a beginning and ending program library These can be the same program two different programs within a library Analysis select omit rules listing Use this option to print a report of all the Select Omit rules defined in an analysis Section 9 B below includes a sample of this report with an explanation of the output 194 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Section 12 A FILE Analysis Reports This section of the Docu Mint User s Guide includes samples of each of the reports that can be generated for FILE analyses Detail listing of selected and or omitted fields by file DM 307 This report prints a list of all fields included in the selected analysis You can optionally choose to not include fields that have been explicitly omitted 2007 10 19 11 35 50 Rule Applied to this record Contact Polled 0 29 97 16 00 33 FILE Analysis Field Listing by File Selected Fields Only From A To Z Analysis 1 FILE Analyze files in LG LIB Date analyzed Objects LG LIB ALL Field Attributes Text File LG CAL Clients Contacts called for evaluations Selected fields CLCLDT 6 2
246. rameter will accept a single library name or the special value ALL Program Field Cross Reference Report The Print Analysis Errors report is created with the following spool file attributes u Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT a User data USRDTA PrtAnzErr Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 227 PRTMNUEXP Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values MENU Name of menus to include in report Menu name GENERIC ALL EXPLODE Explode menu options YES NO JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Menu Explosion Report command produces a report listing menu images options and optionally exploded source listings of the commands and programs each menu step calls If you request to explode the menu options the following guidelines are used in the program explosions a If the option or a CL program executes a non IBM command the command processing program for the command will be exploded a CL programs will be entirely exploded RPG program explosions will list only File specifications and CALL statements Programs called within RPG programs will be exploded according to their type Other program types will list only the program and the fact that it is being called The Menu Explosion Report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 2 or 3 from Docu Mint menu DM MENU Menu DM MENU can be reached by selecting option 21 from menu DM ANZ a Execute command PRTMNUEXP from a c
247. re to be searched This parameter can accept a single source file library name a generic name or the special value ALL SRCMBR Use this parameter to limit the source members to search This parameter works in conjunction with the SRCFILE SRCLIB and SRCTYPE parameters in 236 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference determining which source members are to be searched This parameter can accept a single source member name a generic name or the special value ALL SRCTYPE Use this parm to limit the source member types to search This parameter works in conjunction with the SRCFILE SRCLIB and SRCMBR parameters in determining which source members are to be searched This parameter can accept a single source member type a generic type the special value ALL or the special value BLANK to process source members with a blank source type ORDER Specify what order the report is to appear in Enter one of the following for the ORDER parameter a SOURCE to print the report in source member order causing the source data to be printed only one time in the entire report regardless of the number of unique find strings that were found in the source data a STRING to print a separate report section for each find string requested Each section will report the status of the search for the current find string only RPTMBRS Specify whether or not to report any source members searched but not found to contain any find string occurrences E
248. requently used option is described in the section The Work with Where Used Command on page 74 of this chapter as well as in the Command Reference section 9 WRKUSEOB Option 9 prompts the Work with Used Objects command to display a list of objects used by the one selected This option is described in detail in the section The Work with Used Objects Command on page 67 later in this chapter as well as in the Command Reference section 10 Analyze object Besides the standard cycle for analyzing libraries using the MRKLIB and STRLIBANZ commands Docu Mint also supports the ability to individually select and document particular objects in a library Use option 10 to do this There are many different DOCOBJ commands included in the software including DOCPGM DOCFILE and so on When you execute this option Docu Mint prompts the DOCxxx command appropriate to the type of the object you selected 11 CMPPGMINF The Compare Program Information command is useful if you are preparing software for distribution or simply want to make sure that the program objects in your production library have been compiled using the latest source code change or reference the correct file layouts This command extracts information about a program object and then compares that information with the values identified on the command parameters Then it generates a report identifying exceptions to the values specified on the command 64 Section Il Working With Libraries
249. ries and Objects name from Docu Mint s cross reference data base and the resolved library name Type Attr Use this field to change the parent object type The list portion displays the type of object such as DTAARA FILE PGM etc The attribute of the object such as CLP LF PF RPG is appended to the type if applicable Seq This represents the source sequence number of the program or procedure at which the object is used or the menu option number that initiates execution of the object Usage This column indicates how the object is used Normally object usage is described by the name of the command or procedure operating on a given object For an explanation of the special object usage descriptions defined by Docu Mint refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 Text This is a description of the object Note that the Generic input field see next appears below this heading on 80 character displays Generic You can use this field to change the generic usage subset criteria Due to space limitations this input field appears below the Text heading on 80 character displays In the list portion of the screen this column displays the generic usage value for the object Due to space limitations this field does not appear on 80 character displays Function Keys F14 Actual Resolved library names Press F14 to toggle the display between showing the actual library names from the object cross reference file or the resolv
250. ription The Program Field Cross Reference command produces a report of field usage within RPG programs Up to ten sets of files may be cross referenced against the programs in up to ten separate RPG source files The report will list for each field in the file s specified the name of the RPG program s referencing the field or NONE if no programs use the field along with a mnemonic indicating how the field is used within that particular program such as ADD INP etc The Program Field Cross Reference report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 1 from Docu Mint menu DM FLD Menu DM FLD can be reached by selecting option 3 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command PGMFLDXREF from a command line Command Parameters FILE Specify up to ten sets of files whose fields should be included on the report Each parameter occurrence can accept a single file name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry can accept a library name or one of the following special values LIBL USRLIBL or ALLUSR RPGSRCF Specify up to ten RPG source files whose programs should be analyzed for field usage from the files specified in the Data file FILE parameter Each parameter occurrence can accept a source file name The library entry can accept a library name or the special value LIBL JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name
251. rk with the libraries in the group use option 1 Option 4 allows you delete a group entry Creating and Populating New Library Groups To create a new library list press F6 from the Work with Library Groups panel When you do this a prompt screen appears where you can enter the group name and description After you add the entry and return to the list of groups you can select option 1 to work with the libraries in the group After you enter this information a panel similar to this one appears next ism 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal x J 10 x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Maintain Group details Select Libraries to Add to Group Library group Library 1 Select Type options press Enter Last Analysis 4 Remove from group Opt Library Group Date Time Last Analysi XL_HEBAPPS WEBSMART 1011008105834 Opt Library Date Time XL_WEBARC WEBSMART XL_WEBDEMO WEBSMART XL_WEBDIST WEBSMART XL_WEBINST WEBSMART Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Add library B gt 11 34 11 34 AO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 3 7 In the panel above which initially comes up empty we have pressed F6 add a library or libraries to the group When you press F6 the window shown here in the upper right is presented which lists the libraries on your system You can use the position to field at the top of the list to go to a specific library or use the roll keys to
252. rogram Indicates an indirect call to the program by a user profile File and Data Usage The following usage descriptions describe file and data area usage within RPG programs They may be used in combination with each other in which case they will be separated by a slash INP OUT DLT will be truncated to DL if it is combined with UPD and OUT UPD OUT DL Usage Code Description INP Input Indicates the file or data area is input capable to the program OUT Output Indicates a file or data area is output by the program UPD Update Indicates the file s records may be updated by the program ADD Add Indicates records may be added to the file by the program DLT Delete Indicates records may be deleted from the file by the program MODD Modified Directly for example a Z ADD operation into that field This concludes the introductory section of this guide The next section is the Quick Start Exercise which walks you through using some of the common features of the software and provides hints on how to use Docu Mint most effectively 24 Section Installation and Tutorial The Quick Start Exercise This is a simple step by step exercise that walks you through some of the most commonly used functions in Docu Mint The exercise uses the demo library DM DEMOLIB which is installed with the software DM DEMOLIB includes a set of files and programs which have been built into a simple application with the program DMMENU set u
253. rules and rerun the analysis before working with the results The remaining sections of this guide describe these processes in detail Explanation of Function Keys Work with Extended Field Analysis F6 Create Press F6 to create a new program or file analysis entry On creation you are prompted for the type of analysis you are creating FILE PGM Based on the analysis type you are presented with panels which prompt for the attributes of the analysis associated FILE entries for PGM only and the analysis rules After you create the entry you return to the panel above to work with the analysis F21 Report Menu Function 21 first prompts you to select one of the analyses then presents a window from which you can select one of several reports The reports currently available for type FILE analyses are a Detail listing of selected omitted fields by file a Summary listing of selected files 158 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions a __ File program impact analysis summary a Analysis select omit rules listing When you select an analysis of type PGM there are 5 reports available Detail listing of selected omitted fields by program Summary listing of affected programs Summary listing of fields referenced by a program Program Display File change requirements work sheet D o O0 O0 D Analysis select omit rules listing These reports are described in more detail in Chapter 12 Explanation of Options 1 Analyze
254. ry and doesn t find it there to try searching for the member in one or more alternate locations Let s start by adding an alternate source reference to try and catch all our problems with CL programs In the example above the source for those programs is actually in a source file in DM DEMOLIB called QCLSRC2 So select option 6 next to the first of the two errors referring to CL programs When you do that a window similar to this one pops up in your screen Alternate Source Reference Compiled From Source Search Look In Source File Library Seq File Library QcLSRC DM DEMOL IB 0 F3 Exit F12 Cance l Type the file name gcusrc2 in library bm DEMOL TB as the alternate source entry You can leave the rest of the information as is Now press Enter until you return to the WWL screen and once more mark the library DM DEMOLIB LOAD using option 8 and then start another analysis of the library using option 6 The second and subsequent times you analyze a library it will only look at changed objects or those which generated errors the first time around so it should run fairly quickly this time After the analysis finishes select option 10 next to the library DM DEMOLIB once more to review your results The two CL programs should have disappeared from the listing Chapter 2 The Quick Start Exercise 29 Now add another alternate reference for the three ILE programs as shown below Alternate Source Reference Compiled From Sour
255. ry one of the field cross reference reports From the Main Menu select option 3 to go to the Field Cross Reference Menu DM FLD Select option 1 from menu DM FLD to run the PEMFLDXREF Program Field Cross Reference command and press Enter Fill in the parms for the PGMFLDXREF command as shown at right For this example we are going to cross reference all the files in the library DM DEMOLIB against the programs in the same lib IM 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal loj x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Program Field Cross Reference PGMFLDXREF Type choices press Enter Data file Library aad aie Sh Se een for more values Analyzed program object lib for more values Batch job description LITEN i ot as soles sean So ao F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fe4 More keys Keyword RPGSRCF not valid for this command ALL Name generic ALL DM DEMOLIB Name LIBL USRLIBL DM DEMOL IB Name USRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom Fie Cancel F13 How to use this display E gt 10 37 AO IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet When you finish entering the values shown press Enter to submit the job Docu Mint will return to the menu DM FLD and display a message that the job was submitted Press F18 from menu DM FLD to work with the output from the report The f
256. s Customizing the DEFAULT Options With the exception of the option 1 on the WWL screen which presents the Work with Analyzed Objects panel for the selected library the DEFAULT options are sensitive to the object type of the entry selected This means that you can customize what happens when the option is selected for programs files data areas and any valid object type 80 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects For example the change option option 2 is shipped with over 30 different variations on what it can do ranging from starting SEU on source members to executing WRKxxx and CHGxxx commands for various object types Below is an illustration of the panel presented when you select option 2 to change the Work with System Libraries option 2 Im 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal f x Eile Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Default Subfile Options Maintenance Item type o eua aa a A Item attribute Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete S Display Item Item Opt Type attr Command _ CLS CHGCLS CLS amp L amp N _ CMD STRSEU SRCFILE amp srclib amp srcfil SRCMBR amp srcmbr OPTI _ CTLD WRKCTLD CTLD amp n _ DEVD HRKDEVD DEVD amp n _ DTAARA CHGDTAARA DTAARA amp 1 amp n _ FILE DSPF STRSEU SRCFILE amp srcl ib amp f SRCMBR amp srcmbr OPTION 2 _ FILE LF STRSEU SRCFILE amp srclib amp f SRCMBR amp srcmbr OPTION 2
257. s When you press F6 to create or select option 2 Change to edit library lists the panel presented is similar to the one illustrated below ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Computer Design WLLEDT 01 Edit Library List User Portion Library list SHIP Tot e be ar ok cd eh dase Library List for Shipping Appl ication Type new changed information press Enter Current library XGPL Name NONE Sequence Sequence Sequence Number Library Number Library Number Library 010 100 190 020 PDFLIB 110 200 030 GN LIB 120 210 040 DB LIB 130 220 050 SHIPPGHS 140 230 060 SHIPFILES 150 240 070 160 250 080 170 090 180 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F15 Edit system portion r gt 19 13 19 13 4B IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 9 6 This is the Edit Library List User Portion display From here you can add remove and change the order of libraries in the user portion of the library list requested To edit the system portion of the library list Press F15 136 Section III Menu Reference Current library Specify the name of this library list s current library Enter a value of NONE or leave this field blank if the library list does not have a current library Sequence Number This is the order in which the libraries in this portion of
258. s Reference Select option 2 from the Docu Mint Main Menu to present the Object Cross Reference Menu DM OB The options on this menu include the commonly used Work with Used Objects WUO and Work with Where Used WWU commands Note that you must mark and analyze your libraries before object information will be available from these menu options From this panel you can also access the Object Documentation Menu DM ANZ using option 30 This menu is described in Chapter 10 of this guide Below is an illustration of the options available on the DM OBJ menu isn 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal I File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM OBJ Business Computer Design V6ROMO Docu Mint Object Cross Reference Menu DEMO 1 Work with Used Objects WRKUSEOBJ 2 Work with Where Used HRKWHRUSE 4 Orphaned Objects Report objects w no source PRTORPHOBJ 5 Print Unused Objects Report objects not referenced PRTUNUSOBJ 30 Object Documentation Menu DM ANZ 90 Sign off Selection or command gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Hork with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 2 7 Ko Figure 6 1 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet The next sections of this chapter describe each of these options in detail For a complete listing and explanation of each of these commands and their parms
259. s Type Analyses are of two types FILE and PGM These values are selected at a previous window at creation time and cannot be changed from this panel Program Name and Library Type the program to run the analysis over Valid values are as follows u An existing program name a A generic value such as GN to analyze all programs beginning with the characters GN in the selected library a ALL to analyze all the programs in the selected library Associated FILE Analysis References The bottom portion of this panel displays a list of existing FILE analyses allowing you to optionally select one or more to attach to your PGM analysis Press F8 to toggle the list between showing all the FILE analyses or only the ones you have already selected Use option 1 to select new ones 178 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Relationship Between FILE and PGM Analyses FILE Analysis Each FILE analysis will process its established rules to select fields from the file or set of files specified After the selected field list has been reviewed and refined the results indicate the fields and files which match the criteria defined by the rules and are subject to change The FILE analysis indicates the fields and data base files that match the selection criteria and will require a change The PGM analysis is then used to determine which programs are affected by the proposed file changes PGM Analysis The PGM analysis w
260. s a chapter describing each of the Docu Mint menus and the commands that you can run from them The menus provide access to all the Docu Mint commands and options including the less frequently used ones which aren t directly available from the WWL and WWO screens Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Part IV explains how to create and execute extended field analyses on your files and programs Chapter 12 includes examples and illustrations of the reports that you can select from to print the results of your analyses Section V Docu Mint Command Reference The final section of this manual includes a detailed description of every Docu Mint command with the expected parameters command functions and expected output 12 Section Installation and Tutorial How to Use this Manual This manual is designed to be used both when you are just starting out and also as an everyday reference tool when using Docu Mint Read this section to get started using the software and to build and run your first analysis It also includes a section describing how to resolve some common system documentation problems using Docu Mint Chapter 2 includes a Quick Start exercise that walks you through some simple instructions to mark and analyze the Docu Mint demo library and extract some sample information from it After you finish reading the first two chapters you should also read through most of Part II to learn how to use the two main displays i
261. s a support library containing objects required to install updates The installation libraries BCDINSTALL and DM INST can be removed once the install is complete If you have any questions about any of these components or you need help with removing them when uninstalling the software please contact our support team 14 Section Installation and Tutorial Installation Instructions Your Docu Mint install should take about 5 10 minutes depending on the model of your IBM i Follow the instructions below 1 Ifyou don t yet have the install file on your PC go to the Free Trial and Downloads link at www bcdsoftware com and fill out the download form Then choose the option to go to the software download and download the IBM i install file The name of the file downloaded to your PC is docu mintv650 exe 2 When the download finishes double click this file to unpack the install files and launch the FTP program that will transfer the install library to your IBM i Si BCD Upload Express Docu Mint Rel V6R5M0 for AS 400 RISC BCD 1986 2008 iSeries IP Address 192 168 0 100 User ID CER Password Activity Log Your use of this utility indicates your acceptance of the software usage Terms and Conditions found by dicking the Read Me button 2008 ExcelSystems Software Development Inc Read Me Advanced Figure 1 1 3 Enter your IBM i IP address and the o secorR password Then click the Upload
262. s presented to build a rule of type COLHDG 21302 OL x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work Hith Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule Analysis 1 Analyze files in LG LIB Property COLHDG Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 5 Type information press Enter Relationship CT EQ CT Start Colum 41 Search criteria Date Dt Dat Day Year Yr Month Mnth i F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel 16 75 Al MH KS IM II EXCEL400 EXLPC06 4 16 75 K 3487 HC Terminal excel400 via NS Router NUM Ki H Figure 11 6 Relationship Two relationships can be defined in COLHDG rules EQ and CT If you select EQ Docu Mint evaluates each column heading field entry as specified by the COLHDG keyword beginning with the column specified for the number of spaces of each column heading or portion of column heading that you enter If you select CT Docu Mint will check for the entered column heading from the start column position to the end of the line Start Column Enter the column at which to begin selecting the entered column heading s See the comments above for the importance of the start column in using EQ vs CT The search criteria is case sensitive Search Criteria On this line you can enter one or more column headings or heading fragments to be located If you specify multiple entries you must leave o
263. sed on the reference field 232 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference The Reference Field Cross Reference report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 3 from Docu Mint menu DM FLD Menu DM FLD can be reached by selecting option 2 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command REFFLDXREF from a command line Command Parameters FRMREFFLD The from reference field parameter is used in conjunction with the To reference field TOREFFLD parameter to identify a range of reference fields to include on the report Enter the name of the first reference field to appear on the report or the special value ALL to produce a report listing all reference fields in Docu Mint s cross reference files TOREFFLD This parameter is used in conjunction with the From reference field FRMREFFLD parameter to identify a range of reference fields to include on the report Enter the name of the last reference field to appear on the report or the special value FRMREFFLD to limit the report to a single reference field This parameter is ignored if the From reference field value is ALL JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Reference Field Cross Reference Report The Reference Field Cross Reference report is created with the following
264. sented The splash screen displays the phone and fax numbers for BCD and BCD Technical Support When you select the option to run the CHGDOCCTL command this panel is presented ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Computer Design CHGDOCCTL Change Docu Mint Control Data Type choices press Enter Company name Business Computer Design Display splash screen N N No Y Yes F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel i gt 6 35 6 35 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 9 2 Company Name Enter your company name Be sure the company name is left justified Docu Mint will center the company name on the appropriate displays and reports Display Splash Screen Specify whether or not you want the annoying Welcome to Docu Mint window to appear each time you start Docu Mint with the STRDOC command This field accepts a value of N suppress the splash screen or Y enable the splash screen Please note that the splash screen may only be suppressed if you are running under a live not demo version of Docu Mint 132 Section IIl Menu Reference Option 2 Change Library Attributes Use the Change Library Attributes option to change Docu Mint specific attributes associated with a library name This command is mainly used for creating groups of libraries for analysis and setting whet
265. sis functions you need to have run the library analysis with the FLDXREF parm set to YES the default Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 157 After a library has been analyzed you can then come to this panel and begin to build an extended field analysis The steps to do that are as follows 1 From the panel above press F6 and select the analysis type PGM or FILE 2 After you select the analysis type a panel is presented where you can fill in additional values such as a description of the analysis and the object name s When you select an analysis of type PGM a list panel is presented with a subset of the existing FILE analyses allowing you to select one or more FILE analyses to be associated with the program analysis 3 After you create the analysis entry you can return to the panel above and use option 7 to define a set of rules for field identification Rules can be defined for field selection as well as for field exclusion 4 After defining the rules you then return to this panel and use option 1 to run the analysis of the files or programs in the selected library 5 After the analysis has been run you can select option 8 print the results or use option 9 to work with the results of the analysis When you work with the results of the analysis you can explicitly omit specific fields or work with field cross reference and dependency reports At this time you may also choose to refine your selection
266. solving obj name How to treat blank lib references How to treat variable lib references Display actual lib name or resolved Maximum explosion levels to indent Character preceding indention Columns to indent on explosion Where the command output is sent Valid values Object name GENERIC ALL Library name ALL ALL CMD MENU PGM PROC QRY USRPRF ALC ALL DCLF DLC DLT EXC MGT OPR OVR REF Valid object type PROC ALL NO YES NO YES Named library list JOBD Lib name CURLIB FLIB LIBL USRLIBL Lib name CURLIB FLIB LIBL USRLIBL ACTUAL RESOLVE 0 99 NOMAX Valid character 1 20r3 PRINT The Work with Used Objects command provides you with a list interface to the objects used by commands menus procedures programs queries and user profiles on your system Work with Used Objects WUO allows you to work with lists representing the flow of work on your system From these lists you can perform operations such as copy delete edit and rename WUO performs these operations by calling commands with substitution values passed from the list of items you are working with for example library name object name object type Work with Used Objects may be initiated in one of the following ways n m Selecting option 9 from the Work with Analyzed Objects WWO panel Selecting option 2 from Docu Mint menu DM OBJ Menu DM OBJ can be reached by selecting op
267. source file POFLIB ORPGSRC CUSTHST FILE PF 1998 01 15 OPGHR GNaLIB OQDDSSRC CUSTHST Custoner Haster file kek Source not found iik Source Heber CUSTHST found in source file DBgDEHO QIDSSRC wiit Source Heber CUSTHST found in source file GNHDEHOLIB ODDSSAC seit Source Heber CUSTHST found in source file GNaNEHPOF ODDSSRC seit Source Heber CUSTHST found in source file PDFLIB ODDSSRC Hore F3 Exit Fl2 Cancel FI9 Left F20 Right F24 tiore keys K 3 22 3 22 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 11 At the top of the report you can see that the reported has printed several entries uncommented Then when it reached the physical file COMPMST it reports that the source for this file was not found however source was found in several other libraries In cases like this Docu Mint not only scans marked libraries to find likely parents for the orphaned objects it goes through all the libraries on your system If you don t require this level of detail you can use the Print Unused Objects report described in Option 5 Print Unused Objects Report below 108 Section III Menu Reference Option 5 Print Unused Objects Report The Print Unused Objects Report PRTUNUSOB is a list of objects that are not referenced in program calls menus or by any other object in a specified library that has been analyzed Below is an illustration of the panel prompting you for the parameters required to run
268. spool file attributes a Spooled file FILE QSYSPRT a User data USRDTA RefFldXref Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 233 RSHLIBCNT Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIB Library to refresh counts for Library name GENERIC ALL JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Refresh Library Counts command is used to maintain Docu Mint s library control file DLIBCP to quickly update the count of the number of objects in a library to be later displayed by the System Library Directory SYSLIBDIR command Refresh Library Counts may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 12 from Docu Mint menu DM LIB Menu DM LIB can be reached by selecting option 1 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command RSHLIBCNT from a command line Command Parameters LIB Specify the libraries to refresh the counts for This parameter can accept a single library name a generic name or the special value ALL JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB RSHLIBCTL Command The Refresh Library Control command is used to maintain Docu Mint s library control file DLIBCP to insure all libraries on your system are in the control file to be later displayed by the System Library Directory SY
269. st Entries 00008 136 Option 11 Maintain the Alternate Source Definitions File 138 Option 12 Maintain Alternate ILE Module Object Library Reference File 140 Option 13 Maintain the Options Control File 0 0 eee eee eee 141 Creating Option Control Records 00 cee cece eee eee nee eee 142 Working with Option Control Records 0 0 0 c cece cece eee 142 Chapter 10 MENU DM ANZ OBJECT DOCUMENTATION cecceccccccccccccecseecsecsessaceacs 145 Option 20 Menu DM FILE File Documentation Menu 147 Option 21 Menu DM MENU Menu Documentation 0 148 Option 22 Menu DM PGM Program Documentation 005 149 Program Explosion Inquiry 0 0 cee cece eee een ees 151 Table of Contents 5 Chapter 11 EXTENDED FIELD ANALYSIS FUNCTIONS cecccecccccecccnsceevcessesceesceesceeees 155 OM CLVICW acinar otek este E oP T esis 2a E EE E ena 155 The Work with Extended Field and Program Analysis Panel 157 Creating and Editing a FILE Field Analysis Entry 0008 160 Working with FILE Analysis Rules 0 0 0 00 eee cece eee eee 162 Creating Select Field Properties 0 e cece cence eee ene eee 164 ATR Selection Field Type Attributes 00 eee eee eee 165 COLHDG Selection Column Heading 0 cee eee ee eee 166 EDTCDE Selection Edi
270. start column in using EQ vrs CT Search Criteria On this line you can enter one or more search criteria to be searched for These must be enclosed in single quotes with one space between multiple entries If you specify EQ as the relationship Docu Mint evaluates each line of code beginning with the column specified for the number of characters of each of the values entered Please refer to the previous sections in this chapter on FILE analysis rules for descriptions of how to define the remaining PGM rules 182 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions Working with PGM Analysis Results To work with the results of Docu Mint PGM field analysis use option 9 from the Work With Extended Field and Program Analysis panel As described in Working with FILE Analysis Results only one of the select rules needs to be satisfied to include a field After reviewing the results of your field selections you may find several fields that should not be included in the results even though they match one or more of the select rules defined Unwanted fields can be omitted by creating a generic omit rule and running the analysis again or by explicitly omitting the selected field from the results panel When you select option 9 to work with your results the panel presented is similar to this one 21302 BEE File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Work with SELECTED Field Entries Program and File Fields Displayed Ana
271. such as ADD INP etc 112 Section Ill Menu Reference Below is an illustration of the panel that is presented to prompt you for the parameters to run a program field cross reference report ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x Fie Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Program Field Cross Reference PG FLDXREF Type choices press Enter Data file i Name genericx ALL Library 1 ee eee Name LIBL USRLIBL for more values Analyzed program object lib Name for more values Batch job description xUSRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Library 2 2 eee Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 Ho IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 7 2 You can enter up to 10 files or sets of files to document against a corresponding program or set of programs which will be analyzed for field usage of the specified files To add additional files type a sign on the for more values prompt and press Enter and another panel will be presented at which you can type them in Press F4 on any of the parameters to present a list of valid options For a complete description of these parameters please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 113 Below is a section from a program
272. t the program objects in your production library have been compiled using the latest source code change or reference the correct file layouts the compare program information command will be useful This command extracts information about program objects in the library specified It then compares that information with the values identified on the command parameters and generates a report identifying exceptions to the values specified on the command You can run the CMPPGMINF command directly from a command line or by selecting option 11 from the Work with Analyzed Objects W WO panel Command Parameters Program name and library The program can be identified as a specific program generic program name or ALL programs in a library The library name parameter identifies the library containing the PGM objects not the source Flag rcds not at release level If you want to identify the programs that do not match a specific OS 400 release level enter the OS 400 release level compare value in the format of VxRxMx where V is the OS 400 version R is the release level and M is the modification level For example release V4R5M0 is version 4 release 5 modification level 0 If specify NO for this parameter no comparison to the program release level will be made Compare program source library If you want to make sure that the program objects being processed were compiled using members from a specific source file library enter the name of the
273. t Codes sss cise Serbs ad od etl elie nia ESEE 167 EDTWRD Selection Edit Word 0 0 ccna 168 NAME Selection Field Name 0 cee 169 QNAME Selection Qualified Select Omit Rule o n nananana ennnen 170 TEXT Selection Field Text 0 ccc cece eee eee 171 TYPE Selection Field Type 0 cece cece cece eee eee 172 Working with FILE Analysis Results 0 00 e cece cece eee eee 173 Field Where Used Information Option 7 00 cece eee eee eee 176 Creating a PGM Analysis 0 cece eee een eee 178 Relationship Between FILE and PGM Analyses 0 00000 ae 179 Working with Rules for PGM Analyses 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 180 PGM Analysis RUES a doko oie sey oo Natal auatte adele ed alls Pagel Siete fe 181 CONSTANT Selection Constant Name 0 c cee cee eee 182 Working with PGM Analysis Results 0 0 cece cece cee eee ee 183 Printing the Work Sheet Option 6 from Figure 11 19 0 186 DSPF PRTF Usage Option 7 from Figure 11 19 00 000 187 Fields that Affect this Field list Option 8 from Figure 11 19 188 Fields Affect By this Field list Option 9 from Figure 11 19 189 Chapter 12 EXTENDED FIELD ANALYSIS REPORTS sceescccscccccscenscceeccseesceesceescesens 191 OVENI EW ae Fast E RRA gle Petar dea E leat ares EA sae Motte ER EEN 191 FILE Analysis Reports 0
274. t Gener ic GHaGOt Gal IB GH HALL Ngeli GHaLIB PGH RPGLE Parent ProGen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R Ng CNaL IB MODULE BOUND Hodule not found on syster COPY GHaSZSUPR GNHSRC 4HODULE RPGL BOUND Zero suppress routine RPGHOD scopy GNAGOISAY CHaL IB SRUPGH RPGL BOUND Proen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R REF l GNa601H50 GNaLIB MODULE BOUND Hodule not found on syster COPY GNa601h51 GH SRC AHODULE RPGL BOUND Is flid PGHFIELD If so return int naie RPGHOD COPY 11 GHAFPPL1 GHaLIB FILE LF 18 00 INP Proen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 022 40CLF GNa601h52 CHSRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Functions for Hork fields RPGHOD COPY l GNa601H53 GN SRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Retrieve existing generated code to urite APGHOD COPY 1 GNabOTHS4 GHySRC HODULE RPGL BOUND Open and access Texplate Attributes file RPGHOD 4COPY li GN TPAL1 GNaLIB FILE LF 19 00 INP Proen Plus c 1988 99 ExcelSystens rel 5 02R 4OCLF Botton F3 Exit F4 Pronpt FS Refresh F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel Fig Actual library nanes F23 Hore options F24 ore keys K 8 2 82 K IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 3 Object This field can be used to change the parent object name After changing this value and pressing Enter the WUO list display is rebuilt based on the new selection criteria The list portion of this column displays the object name If the ob
275. t over the physical file To activate this feature it is necessary for the physical file s library to be in the simulated library list in order for Docu Mint to locate that file s database relations This can be accomplished by making the proper entry in the command s LIBL parameter or by editing the simulated library list once you are at the list display The build program for the WWU command uses a system file called QADBFDEP which stores file dependencies In order to see file dependencies a user needs to have authority to this file It is possible that at newer releases of the OS 400 the default authority level on this file has changed in which case users have to be specifically granted authority to this file if they don t get results including file dependencies If authority cannot be granted try running the WWU with a generic file name for example CUSTMS for CUSTMST CUSTMSL1 CUSTMSL2 etc Work with Where Used may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 8 from the Work with Analyzed Objects WWO panel a Selecting option 3 from Docu Mint menu DM OBJ Menu DM OBJ can be reached by selecting option 2 from menu DM MAIN a Type WRKWHRUSE or WWU on any command line a Type WWU ona subfile option line Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 247 Command Parameters Note that all parameters except Output OUTPUT accept the special value PRV which automatically uses the value of the parameter fr
276. t the top of each page YES or to print through the page perforations NO Due to the nature of the report it is sometimes easier to follow the flow of the indented listing if the report headings are suppressed after the first page This parameter accepts a value of NO or YES HILITE When displaying the indented RPG source this parameter controls whether or not comment statements will appear highlighted DSPATR HI at the workstation This parameter accepts a value of NO or YES Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 223 LDA Command The Edit Local Data Area command allows you to view and work with the contents of the local data area and job switches from a display file rather than making a blind change through the Change Data Area command This command is easy to run from a command line and can be easily called from a program as a useful debugging tool Edit Local Data Area may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting option 4 from Docu Mint menu DM UTL a Execute command LDA from a command line For a description of the panels presented when you run the LDA command and how to use them please refer to Option 4 Edit Local Data Area on page 128 MRKLIB Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIB Valid library values Library name to be flagged for analysis ACTION Action to take for selected lib LOAD REMOVE NONE RMVLVL Library removal level XREF ALL The Mark Library comman
277. t this option next to a specific field the report defaults to running over just the one program An option is presented allowing you select whether to include omitted fields or not Option 10 is illustrated in Appendix B Explanation of Functions F8 Selected Omitted Records Press F8 to toggle between showing a list of the omitted records and the list of selected records Toggling F8 also results in option 4 alternating between an Omit and a Select option F9 File Fields Only Pgm and File Fields Press F9 to toggle the list between showing all fields selected or only actual file fields This view filters out system field occurrences such as UMDY F10 View by Field View by Pgm Lib F10 toggles the view of the list between the default by program library and listing by field name F20 Print Results Press F20 to generate a report listing all the fields resulting from this analysis including the rules by which they were selected and or omitted F21 Print Worksheet F21 allows you to run the program field cross reference report across multiple libraries This report is identical to the one generated using option 6 from this panel which is described immediately below Chapter 11 Extended Field Analysis Functions 185 Printing the Work Sheet Option 6 from Figure 11 19 Below is an illustration of the window presented when you select option 6 for the program LG B01 Program field cross reference report Analysis number 2 An
278. te the object count for the selected library Option 20 executes the Docu Mint RSHLIBCNT command Please refer to page 234 of the command reference section for additional details Explanation of WWL Functions As with the options you can also customize the functions available from the Work with System Libraries To do so press F8 from the WWL panel to present the Work with WWL Options panel and from there press F7 to work with the default functions Below are descriptions of the functions initially shipped with the software F2 Main menu Press F2 to present the Docu Mint Main Menu The Main Menu was the initial screen presented in earlier releases of Docu Mint From it you can access all the Docu Mint commands and other menus or return to this screen by pressing F3 again If you want to set the Main Menu as your initial Docu Mint screen you can use the CFGSTRDOC command to do this F3 Exit Press F3 to exit Docu Mint F4 Prompt Press F4 if you have typed a command on the command line and wish to prompt it for the parameters F5 Refresh Press F5 to refresh the last library analysis date and time To refresh library object counts use the RSHLIBCNT command To refresh the list of all libraries to reflect added or removed libraries run the RSHLIBCTL command F6 WW lib groups For additional convenience when documenting sets of libraries Docu Mint allows you to organize related libraries into groups You can use the CHGLIBATR
279. tern PRV PRV pattern Columns to indent xPRY PRV 1 2 3 Output i a a ee ee x PRINT Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys K gt 5 37 5 37 Ko IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 2 When you initially run this command all parameters except the Maximum explosion level and the Output default to PRV indicating that command will use the parameter values from the last time it was executed To run a WUO the critical values you need to specify are the Parent object and library and the Parent object type The remaining options allow you to customize the output you ll see in the report 94 Section Ill Menu Reference For a detailed description of all the command parameters please refer to Section V Docu Mint Command Reference The next few sections describe how to work with the command output Using the Work with Used Objects Display Below is a sample of the output for WUO object command when run over the program GN G01 in GN LIB with a maximum explosion level of 3 ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal ioj x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Business Conputer Des ign MuoDs4 01 Hork Hith Used Objects Type options press Enter 2 Edit 3Copy Delete SeDisplay 7 Renate 8 Display description 10 Qocunent 1Y Hove 12 Hork Hith Opt Object Library Type Attr Seq Usage Tex
280. that use the file COMPMST Details include the way the file is used and the statement number at which that happens From this panel lox File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Mint Business Computer Design WHUDS3 01 Work with Where Used Type options press Enter 2 Edit 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Rename 8 Display desc Opt Object Library Type Attr Usage Seqt Text COMPMST FILE _ COMPMST FILE PF Child Company master fi DDORDH DM DEMOLIB PGM RPGLE INP 98 00 Maintain Order He DMCMPK DM DEMOLIB PGM INP OUT Program not found DMCMPK DM DEMOLIB MODULE RP INP 66 00 Maintain Company DMCMPK DM DEMOLIB MODULE RP REF 103 00 Maintain Company DMCOMP DM DEMOLIB PGM RPGLE INP 82 00 Work with Company DMCUST DM DEMOLIB PGM RPGLE INP 98 00 Working with Cust gt Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt FS5 Refresh F9 Retrieve Fe3 More options F24 More keys C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 EB gt 8 2 82 Kb IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet Num 5 you can select option 2 to drop into the source for the selected program Note that this panel also supports a 132 column display if you have your emulation set up that way 32 Section Installation and Tutorial When you finish reviewing the output press F3 until you get back to the Work with Analyzed Objects panel At that panel press F2 to go to the Docu Mint Main Menu and we ll now t
281. the library list will be searched for an object You can change the search order by changing the sequence numbers You can add a library to the search list by adding its name and a sequence number For example to add a library MYLIB to the list so that it is searched for after the library with sequence number 10 but before library 20 enter any sequence number from 11 to 19 along with the name MYLIB When you press Enter the list will be resequenced To remove a library blank out the library name Library Specify the name of the library at this position in this portion of the library list F15 Edit system user portion Toggles the display between the system portion of the library list and the user portion of the library list Chapter 9 Menu DM CFG Docu Mint Configuration 137 Option 11 Maintain the Alternate Source Definitions File When an object is compiled on the IBM i a link is established between the object and the source member used in creating the object Docu Mint relies on this source object link when it is asked to update the cross reference files during a library or object analysis If an object s source is deleted moved or renamed the link between object and source is broken This most often occurs when development source is moved into production source after a production object has been compiled from the development source When this situation occurs Docu Mint needs help in locating the source for these orphan
282. this report ifm 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal A Sifs xi File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Orphaned Objects Report PRTUNUSOBJ Type choices press Enter Object name ALL Name ALL Analyzed Library DMHDEMOLIB Name Object Type ee ee es ALL ALL ALRTBL AUTL Batch job description USRPRF Name NONE USRPRF Library 45 ocak rca ae LIBL Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh Fi2 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys LE gt 7737 7 37 fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 Figure 6 12 Explanation of Panel Object Name Library Enter the name and library of the object that you want to check usage of or ALL to run the program over an entire library If you type a specific object name and library and that object is in fact used somewhere the output would report that there were no unused objects satisfying the selected criteria Object Type Enter the type of the object for which you are checking usage Press F4 on this line to present a list of valid object types This command also supports ILE objects Batch Job Description Enter you batch job description or NONE to run the command interactively Chapter 6 Menu DM OBJ Object Cross Reference 109 Here is an illustration of a portion of a Print Unused Objects report sm 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250
283. ting of selected omitted fields by program Program Display file work sheet impact summary Program Display file change requirements work sheet Analysis select omit rules listing F4 Select analysis Fi2 Cancel Figure 12 2 Explanation of Options Docu Mint defaults to printing reports for the analysis that you selected however you can also press F4 from here to select a different one Below is an overview of the reports that can be generated for PGM type analyses Detail listing of selected omitted fields by program Use option 1 to generate a report that includes all the fields in the PGM analysis including both selected and omitted fields When you select option 1 Docu Mint prompts you for an analysis if one has not already been selected and the range of programs to include Please refer to Section 10 B PGM Analysis Reports on page 199 for a sample of this report with an explanation of the output Program Display file work sheet impact summary This option allows you to generate a summary report of all the programs and display files impacted by the fields in your analysis When you select option 2 a panel is presented at which you can enter a beginning and ending program library These can be the same program or two different programs within a library When you use option 2 the report defaults to a summary format Please refer to Section 10 B PGM Analysis Reports on page 199 for a sample of this report Prog
284. tion 2 from menu DM MAIN m m Command Parameters Note that all parameters except Maximum explosion level MAXLVL and Output OUTPUT accept the special value PRV which automatically uses the value of the parameter from your last use of the Work with Used Objects command Type WRKUSEOBJ or WUO on any command line Type WUO ona subfile option line Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 243 OB Specifies the parent object name You can use this parameter along with the Library and Parent object type parameters to subset the list of objects shown at the primary parent level of the list This parameter can accept a single object name a generic name or the special value ALL LIB Specifies the parent object library name This parameter is used in conjunction with the Parent object and Parent object type parameters This parameter can accept a single library name or the special value ALL OBJTYPE Specifies the parent object type This parameter is used in conjunction with the Parent object and Library parameters Valid entries for this parameter are ALL CMD MENU PGM PROC QRY or USRPRE DSPGENUSG In addition to storing specific information about how an object is used such as CALL SBMJOB OVRDBF INP OUT Docu Mint also maintains a generic usage definition For example since both the CALL and SBMJOB commands initiate a process on the IBM i their functions are tied together by a generic usage def
285. tion Menu 145 Object library default value 208 Object Types abbreviations used in reports 23 Object Usage abbreviations used 23 tracking using the WRKUSEOBJ com mand 67 tracking using the WRKWHRUSE command 74 Objects changing via the WWO panel 63 compiling from the WWO panel 65 copying via the WWO panel 63 displaying library object details 57 documenting individually from WWO 64 showing all objects on the system 62 working with analyzed objects 48 Omitting Specific Fields From an Analysis 170 Option 11 maintaining the alternate source defini tions file 138 Option 13 maintaining the options control file 141 Option Control Records creating 142 Options customizing WWL and WWO options 80 Options Control File 141 Out 176 P PAGEBRK 221 PGM Analysis overview 156 PGMFLDXREF command reference 225 226 Program Field Cross Reference Report 112 using the command 112 Physical Files including logicals in WWU results 247 Printing analysis errors 54 extended analysis select omit rules 162 extended field analysis results 191 Program Documentation Menu 149 Program Explosion Report 150 program field cross reference usage values 114 program field cross reference report usage values 120 Program Field Usage 119 PRTANZERR command reference 227 using the command 89 PRTFLAYO Printer File Layouts 148 PRTMNUEXP command reference 228 Print Menu Explosion Report 149 PRTMNUOPT Print Menu Options 149 PRTORPHOBJ com
286. tion is entered This parameter can accept a single library name or the special value CURLIB Replace object Use this prompt to indicate that you want to delete the existing object and replace it with the new object created when you compile Enter a Y to delete the existing object before starting to compile If the compilation fails the object is not restored Enter an N if you do not want to delete the existing object before starting to compile 208 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Job description Use this prompt to specify the name of the job description to use for submitting a job in batch mode This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRE The library entry can accept a library name or a special value of LIBL or CURLIB Default source file Use this prompt to specify the name of the source file to use when Docu Mint options do not have a source file to work with For example when using the Copy option on a source member Docu Mint will default the target source file to the value from this prompt CHGLIBATR Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values LIB Valid library values Library whose attributes will be changed GROUP Value to associate to a library Any valid group name DLTOM Library master record deletion indicator YES NO SAME ACTION Action to take for selected lib LOAD REMOVE NONE SAME RMVLVL Library removal level for action XREF ALL REMO
287. tion or command F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F14 Work with submitted jobs F4 Prompt F6 Display messages Fie Cancel Fi8 Hork with output C Copyright BCD 1982 2001 B gt 2 7 o Figure 10 4 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet DOCMENU Document Menus The DOCMENU command initiates an analysis of a menu or menus The same degree of analysis is done as that produced by the STRLIBANZ command with the difference that all objects requested by a DOCxxx command are analyzed even if the object was successfully analyzed previously and has not been changed since 148 Section Ill Menu Reference PRTMNUOPT Select this option to print a list of menu options PRTMNUEXP Menu Explosion Report The Menu Explosion Report command produces a report listing menu images options and optionally exploded source listings of the commands and programs each menu step calls Option 22 Menu DM PGM Program Documentation When you select option 22 from the menu DM ANZ the Program Documentation Menu is presented illustrated below ifm 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal e a x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help DM PGM Business Computer Design VGROMO Docu Mint Program Documentation Menu 1 Document Programs DOCPGM 2 Document ILE RPG Modules DOCMODULE 3 Document Service Programs DOCSRYPGM 4 Indent CL Source INDCLSRC 5 Indent RPG or ILE RPG source
288. tions XGPL file Tech Support Evaluation Call DetailsXGPL QDDSSRC LG CALD file Client Master File XGPL QDDSSRC LG CLTF file View by customer number XGPL QDDSSRC LG CLTF6 file Join of Client and Contact XGPL QDDSSRC LG CLTJ1 file Client File by Client Number XGPL QDDSSRC LG CLTL1 RPG Collect Contact Stats LG LIB QRPGSRC LG B01 RPG Batch file to make search ID LG LIB QRPGSRC LG B04 RPG Call report for BCD LG LIB QRPGSRC LG R01 RPG Trial Call report for BCD LG LIB QRPGSRC LG R06 RPG Call stats by Contact LG LIB QRPGSRC LG R13 RPG Log Text shadow of lg 002 LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 0B2 RPG Log Calls LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 001 RPG Log Text LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 002 RPG Add Contact Client LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 005 RPG Change Client LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 006 RPG Change Contact LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 009 RPG Add Contact LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 010 RPG All Calls By Day LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 012 RPG Calls with date LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 013 RPG Contact Maintenance LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 015 RPG View Contact History LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 016 RPG Change contact client LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 017 RPG Select Caller LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 018 RPG Maintain Contact Information LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 026 RPG Client Comment Maintenance LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 027 RPG Tasks for this call LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 043 RPG Calls for this task LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 044 RPG Merge Contacts LG LIB QRPGSRC LG 060 RPG Select Contact Client for Merging LG LIB
289. to their original values and redisplays the screen F6 Edit Presents a display that allows you to modify the library list used by WWU when resolving object libraries A value of USRDEN User defined denotes a unique combination of libraries not represented by a named library list For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F17 Subset Presents a display that allows you to change the parameters which control the amount of information appearing in the list See Using the Subset Work with Where Used Display above for further information F18 Change Docu Mint defaults Presents a display which allows you to select the default values for certain operations in Docu Mint For additional information on the changing Docu Mint defaults refer to Docu Mint Terminology on page 23 Chapter 4 Working with Analyzed Objects 79 Customizing the WWL and WWO Options Docu Mint allows you to customize the options and function keys at both the Work with System Libraries and Work with Analyzed Objects screen To do this press F8 from either of these panels In both cases the panel presented is similar im 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal d to this one Eile Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork With WHL Options Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Copy ZWRKPDF Panel Opt Opt Text 4 Delete Description 5S Display On 0 x Funct
290. tributes COLHDG Field column headings xEDTCDE Field edit code xEDTHRD Field edit word NAME Field name QNAHE Qualified Lib file amp field name TEXT Field text TYPE Field type F12 Cancel Figure 11 4 You can define 8 different FILE Select types These are Q 0D O0 O0 O0 O O O0 ATR Checking field attributes including field length decimals or type COLHDG Searching for text within the field column headings EDTCDE Searching for specific Edit Words EDTWRD Searching for specific Edit Words NAME Checking the field name for specified characters QNAME Adding specific fields to the selection TEXT Searching for specified text in your file field text entries TYPE Selecting certain field types After you choose the Select rule type another window is presented to confirm your Select and then Docu Mint presents an additional panel for defining the rule parameters The sections below describe each of these Select methods in more detail 164 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions ATR Selection Field Type Attributes When you choose a Select rule of type ATR a panel similar to the one below is presented 21302 lolx File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Hork Hith Rule Detail Field Attribute or Type Select Omit Rule Analysis 4 Initial analysis of programs in GN LIB Property ATR Condition SEL SELECT Sequence 237 Relationshi
291. ts on page 195 2 Summary listing of selected files This report includes a summary listing of all the files included in the selected analysis When you select this option an additional prompt window appears at which you can specify the range of files to be included in the report The default range is ALL For a sample of this report and an explanation of the output please refer to Section 12 A FILE Analysis Reports on page 195 3 File program impact analysis summary This option prints a file change impact analysis report This report includes a summary list of all the affected files in the selected analysis and the programs which reference them Please refer to Section 12 A FILE Analysis Reports on page 195 below for a sample of this report 4 Analysis Select Omit Rules Listing Use option 4 to print a list of the Select and Omit rules defined in the selected analysis Normally this will include a smaller number of Select and Omit rules of several types followed by a greater number of QNAME explicit Omit rules Please refer to Section 12 A FILE Analysis Reports on page 195 for a sample of this report 192 Section IV Extended Field Analysis Functions PGM Analysis Reports When you select an analysis of type PGM the following report menu is presented Extended Analysis Report Menu Analysis 2 F4 List PGM Find all price amp amount fields Select item press Enter PGM Analysis Reporting Detail lis
292. ue Docu Mint should use when resolving a reference to an object whose library is defined as a program variable such as OVRDBE TOFILE amp varlib ANYFILE You can specify a single library name or a special value of CURLIB Current library FLIB System 36 files library Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 245 LIBL Library list or USRLIBL User library list with the suggested default being LIBL DSPLIBNAM Specify whether the library name to be displayed is the actual library name from the object cross reference file or the resolved library name as determined by Docu Mint The resolved library name takes into account the Library list LIBL Treat blank library name as TRTBLKLIB and Treat variable library name as TRTVARLIB parameters when resolving an object s library This parameter accepts a value of ACTUAL or RESOLVE with the suggested default being RESOLVE MAXLVL Controls the maximum number of execution levels to indent This parameter accepts a numeric value of 0 to 99 or the special value NOMAX INDPTN Use this parameter to specify the characters preceding an indented entry These indentation characters are useful in helping you identify what execution level an object is at in relation to it s parent This parameter is used in conjunction with the Columns to indent parameter COLUMNS The Columns to Indent parm is used to specify how many columns each new execution level should be indented Th
293. ue of LIBL or CURLIB DOCPGM Parm FLDXREF The DOCPGM command has an additional parameter available by pressing F10 from the command prompt which allows you to set whether or not you want records written to the internal Extended Field Analysis files when you document a program The reason this option is available is that the number of records written is quite large and if you aren t using the extended field analysis functions you may choose not to build those records Valid value are YES and NO DSPFLAYO Command Parameters Keyword Description Valid values DSPF Display File Display file name GENERIC ALL JOBD Batch job description USRPRF Valid job description The Display File Layouts command produces a report showing display file samples along with field constant and keyword information about the display file The Display File Layouts report may be requested in one of the following ways a Selecting option 3 from Docu Mint menu DM FILE Menu DM FILE can be reached by selecting option 20 from menu DM ANZ a Execute command DSPFLAYO from a command line Chapter 13 Docu Mint Command Reference 219 Command Parameters DSPF Specify the display files to include on the report This parameter can accept a single file name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry must be a valid library name JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a j
294. umber Opt Property Description at right appears Type options pres ATR Field attributes e Change 4 Del COLHDG Field column headings b EDTCDE Field edit code Type a number 1 Opt Seq Property EDTHRD Field edit word NAME Field name next to the ATR ONAME Qualified Lib file amp field name TEXT Field text field property TYPE Field type Fi2 Cancel and press Enter to begin building the rule F3 Exit F4 Lookup F5 Refresh F6 Create Bottom F8 View omit rules Fi2 Cancel F21 Print Define your first B 3 41 rule to trap all an fo IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Numeric fields that are 7 digits long with 2 decimals After you do this press Enter twice to return to the Work with SELECT Rule Detail panel Press F6 to create a second ATR rule and this time select all the numeric fields that are 5 2 N Again press Enter twice to return to the panel showing your rules so far When you define multiple selection rules these are applied in your analysis with an OR condition meaning that all fields that satisfy ANY of the selection criteria are initially included in the results Now press F6 again to create a new rule and this time select a rule of type TEXT to check the field text for specific character strings Define the zax Fie Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help TEXT rule as Work With Rule Detail Field Search Criteria Select Omit Rule shown at right Analysis
295. usly and has not been changed or recompiled since These commands are useful if you have changed only a few objects and want those changes immediately reflected in the cross reference files Please note that these commands do not produce a report Their function is to maintain the cross reference files used by the various Docu Mint on line and reporting modules The Object Analysis Errors Report PRTANZERR or the System Object Directory SYSOBJDIR may be used after documenting objects in order to determine if Docu Mint had any difficulties in analyzing the requested objects Document Objects and related commands may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selecting options 1 through 16 from Docu Mint menu DM ANZ Menu DM ANZ can be reached by selecting option 30 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command DOCxxx from a command line 218 Section V Docu Mint Command Reference Command Parameters OBJ CMD FILE MENU PGM PROC QRY USRPRF Specify the objects to be documented This parameter can accept a single object name a generic name or the special value ALL The library entry must be a valid library name OBJTYPE Specify a valid OS 400 object type This parameter is available for the DOCOBJ command only JOBD Specify the name of the job description to run the report under This parameter can accept a job description name or a special value of NONE or USRPRF The library entry can accept a library name or a special val
296. ver since the object type cannot be determined the pseudo value VAR will be substituted for the object type This parameter accepts a value of NO or YES with the suggested default being YES LIBL Use this parameter to specify the name of a library list to use when Docu Mint resolves an object name Changing the simulated library list is useful for performing What if type scenarios on object usage under different job environments This parameter accepts a named library list or the special value JOB to use the library list of the job executing the WUO command For more information on named library lists see Using the Work with Library Lists WRKLIBL Command TRTBLKLIB Sometimes during the analysis of an object Docu Mint is unable to determine the name of a referenced object s library or supply an appropriate default value In these instances the library name contained in the cross reference files is left blank In order to resolve these objects Docu Mint needs to be instructed on how to handle a missing library name Use this parameter to specify what library name should be substituted in these situations You can specify a single library name or a special value of CURLIB Current library FLIB System 36 files library LIBL Library list or USRLIBL User library list with the suggested default being LIBL TRTVARLIB The Treat Variable Library Name As parameter can be used to specify what library name val
297. w Help Docu Mint Change Session Defaults WHUF 18 01 Type choices press Enter Library list 2 2 2 0B Name JOB F4 List F6 Edit Indent pattern Lit BLANK pattern Columns to indent 2 1 2 3 Screen size 2 eae 4 3 24x80 4 27x132 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Fl Subset F18 Change Docu Mint defaults rK gt 5 39 5 39 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 4 9 Explanation of Panel The Library list prompt causes the list to be rebuilt if the value is changed The next two prompts Indent pattern and Columns to indent change the appearance of the information appearing in the list without rebuilding the list The final prompt Screen size appears only if the workstation you are using is capable of supporting a 27 by 132 character display Type 3 to select a 24 by 80 screen size 4 to select a 27 by 132 screen size Changing the screen size does not cause the list to be rebuilt The Change Session Defaults display may be reached by pressing F18 from either the main Used Objects list or the Subset Work with Where Used display 78 Section Il Working With Libraries and Objects Function Keys F4 List Presents a display that allows you to select a named library list from a list of predefined library lists For more information on named library lists see Option 3 Work with Library Lists on page 134 F5 Refresh Changes the prompts back
298. w is presented ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Type choices press Enter From reference field To reference field Batch job description Library F3 Exit F24 More keys F4 Prompt 5 x Reference Field Xref REFFLDXREF ale Sin terran ALL Reference field xALL ae re FRMREFFLD Reference field FRMREFFLD e eae USRPRF Name NONE USRPRF i bina da car AE Name LIBL CURLIB Bottom F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display rK gt 5 41 541 KO Figure 7 6 IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 4 To generate the reference field cross reference report enter start and end values to specify the range of reference fields to be included in the report Chapter 7 Menu DM FLD Field Cross Reference 117 Below is an illustration of the report output ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal lol x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Display Spooled File File OSYSPRT Page Line 42 2 Control Colunns 1 130 Find Dipa Bastas PFE ERN ETE IPR PE P E E E P TE TT TTTS T E T TTE Docu Hint R05 H02 Business Conputer Design 1999 11 15 11 20 04 Page 4 amp 2 Reference Field Usage Reference Reference Reference Actual Actual Actual File Field Buffer Field File Library Field File Library Type Attributes Fron To OteHPA DOCUDICTNY
299. were successfully analyzed If not check the errors to identify the cause of the problem and if possible correct it the most common error is source not found which you can generally fix with alternate source file entries When you run the library analysis again for this library any objects that were properly analyzed will be skipped unless that object was changed or recompiled Start Library Analysis may be initiated in one of the following ways a Selection option 6 from the Work with System Libraries WWL panel a Selecting option 2 from Docu Mint menu DM LIB Menu DM LIB can be reached by selecting option 1 from menu DM MAIN a Execute command STRLIBANZ from a command line Command Parameters LIBGRP Specify up to 10 library names library group names see the Change Library Attributes CHGLIBATR command for an explanation of library group names or the special single value ALL Each entry is qualified by a Type attribute of LIB or GRP to identify the entry as a library name or a group name INCLUDE Use this parameter to further control processing of the libraries specified by the LIBGRP parameter based on each library s Action at next analysis ACTION attribute Each of the three elements of the INCLUDE parameter corresponds to the three possible states a library s ACTION attribute can assume LOAD REMOVE or NONE a The first element Load controls whether or not to analyze the libraries specified in the
300. wn in the Mark column of the list next to DM DEMOLIB Next we need to start the library analysis To start the in 270 Screen Shots Session rst Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal STE P File Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help library analysis Start Library Analysis STRLIBANZ select option 6 Type choices press Enter next to the Library or Group to analyze gt M DEMOLIB Name ALL Mpe e aoe tk ewe ees E LIB GRP LIB library for more values LIB DM DEMOLIB Include libraries with action Lead sis ae ee a e ae ae YES NO YES and press Enter Remove 2 2 ee ee YES NO YES No action NO NO LOAD REMOVE Batch job description USRPRF Name NONE USRPRF The panel LIBO ee ra a a a s Name LIBL CURLIB presented should appear as shown at right Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel Press Enter F13 How to use this display F24 More keys When you press re Enter Docu Mint returns to the WWL screen And if you press F5 after a few seconds it should display the word ACTIVE in the Analysis Msg ID column next to DM DEMOLIB IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet From the WWL panel you can press F14 to work with submitted jobs Do this and check that the library analysis is running At this point you may have to wait a minute or two for the analysis to finish While you wait here are few suggestions of other t
301. xt to your PGM analysis to work with the results The results im 270 Screen Shots Session rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal E 5 xj houl d b Fie Edt Connection Setup Script Window Help shou e Hork with SELECTED Field Entries Program and File Fields Displayed Analysis e a 2 PGM Find all price amp amount fields similar to those Programs selected DMHDEMOLIB ALL R Program i niia a I 7 8 9 Direct reference in PGM DSPF shown in the Library 2 2 Show 7 8 9 records only _ Y Yes L oes wa E E E TE Omit Inp field usage _ Y Yes panel at right Type options press Enter 4 0mit 5 Display 6 Print work sheet 10 Print Results Program referenes This panel 7 DSPF PRIF reference 8 Fields that affect 9 Fields affected by Opt Program File Field Orign Ln Dc T Usage 789 Text __ DDORDD ORDERD DEXTAM F ILE 7 2 P Inp 7 Extended Amou shows the usage __ DDORDD ORDERD DUNITP FILE 5 2 P Inp 7 Unit Price __ DDORDD ITEMMST IIUNTP FILE 5 2 P Inp Standard Unit of the fields __ DDORDH ORDERH HOTOT FILE 9 2 P Inp 7 Order Total __ DMCSTF CUSTMST CACTBL FILE 7 2 P Inp Account Balan selected by our DMCSTF CUSTMST CCURDU FILE 7 2 P Inp Current Due FILE ji DMCSTF CUSTMST COVR30 FILE 7 2 P Inp Over 30 Days analysis __ DMCSTF CUSTMST COVREO FILE 7 2 P Inp Over 60 Days DMCSTF CUSTMST COVR90 F ILE 7 2 P Inp Over 90 Days in the programs __ DMCSTF CUSTMST RFCRLI xFILE 7 2 P Inp Credit limit A
302. y pressing F18 from either the main used objects list or the Subset Work with Used Objects display Below is an illustration of this panel ifm 2129 Session 4 rsf Reflection IBM 5250 Terminal Of x File Edit Connection Setup Script Window Help Docu Hint Change Session Defaults HUOF 18 01 Type choices press Enter Library list 2 2 JOB Name JOB F4 List F6 Edit Treat blank library names as LIBL Name CURLIB FLIB Treat variable ibrary names as LIBL Name CURLIB FLIB Display library name RESOLVE ACTUAL RESOLVE Indent pattern Lit BLANK pattern Columns to indent 2 1 2 3 Screen size 4 3 24x80 4 27x132 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Fi Subset F18 Change Docu Mint defaults K gt 5 39 5 39 KD IBM 5250 Terminal 192 168 0 100 via Telnet NUM 5 Figure 6 5 Explanation of Panel If any of the first three values are changed Library list Treat blank library names as and Treat variable library names as the list is rebuilt The next three prompts Display library name Indent pattern and Columns to indent will change the appearance of the information appearing in the list without rebuilding the list The final prompt Screen size appears only if the workstation you are using is capable of supporting a 27 by 132 character display Type 3 to select a 24 by 80 screen size 4 to select a 27 by 132 screen size Changi
303. ystem Libraries working with list 45 T Terminology 23 turning splash screen off 132 U Usage tracking object usage 67 tracking object where used info 74 Usage Values program field reference report 114 120 Use extended field analysis info 177 Ww Where Used analysis file field usage 175 WRKWHRUSE command 74 Wild Card character for scan 236 Work Sheet 186 Work with Analyzed Objects reference section 61 Work with Extended Field and Program Analysis Panel 157 Worksheet 184 WRKANZCMD 240 WRKLIBL command reference 242 using the command 134 Work with Library Lists 134 WRKOBJ executing from the WWL screen 50 WRKPGMFLD command reference 242 using the command 119 Work with Program Field Usage 119 WRKUSEOBJ running from the WWO panel 64 WRKUSEOBJ or WUO command reference 243 using the command 67 WRKWHRUSE running from the WWO panel 64 WRKWHRUSE or WWU command reference 247 using the command 74 X XL_WEBSPT support library 14 Index 257 258 Index

Docu-Mint User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents